manualshive.com logo in svg

Toshiba e-STUDIO200L, Service Manual

The Toshiba e-STUDIO200L is a multifunctional device designed for efficient and reliable document management. With its advanced features and user-friendly interface, it simplifies everyday office tasks. Enhance your productivity by downloading the free user manual from manualshive.com to fully explore the capabilities of this powerful device.

Share
Download
background image

CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/

COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)

CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)

CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> LP-ERS, ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, 

MAIN-SW (RESET), TEMP/HUMI-SNR, 
FRNT-COV-SW (e-STUDIO200L) 

CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> LP-ERS, ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, 

MAIN-SW (RESET), TEMP/HUMI-SNR, 
FRNT-COV-SW (e-STUDIO230/230L) 

CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> LP-ERS, ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, 

MAIN-SW (RESET), TEMP/HUMI-SNR, 
FRNT-COV-SW (e-STUDIO280/280S)

CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, 

SID-COV-SNR, SFB-SIZE-SNR, SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, 
SFB-SOL, SFB-FEED-SNR-2

CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> FEED-SNR-1, RGST-SNR, TR-COV-

SW, TNR-SW, AUG-LOCK-SW, TNR-MOT, MAIN-MOT, 
REAR-FAN-MOT, MID-FAN-MOT, RGST, CLT.TR-U-CLT, 
TR-M-CLT

CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> EXIT-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, JOB 

SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET TRAY (OPTION)/
BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION)

CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-

U-FEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, TRY-MOT, TR-L-CLT, 
EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-L-FEED-CLT, 
NEMP-L-SNR, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW

CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> PS-HVT (CN720)/THMS-C-HTR, 

THMS-S-HTR, THMS-EDG-HTR, EXT-SNR

CN310 PWA-F-LGC (CN310) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)

CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> M/DC-POL

CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204)

CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC)

CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> IPC (OPTION)

CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)

CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX (CN701) (OPTION)

CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4)

CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)

CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171)

CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <->DIMM (0)

CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN309)

CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)

CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE

CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST

CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3)

CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN150)/

SCRAMBLER BOARD (OPTION)

CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/

COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)

CN705 PS-ACC (CN705) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122)

CN706 PS-ACC (CN706) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN311), 

PWA-F-FUS (CN431)

CN707 PS-ACC (CN707) <-> PWA-FAX (CN702) (OPTION)/

FINISHER (J 599) (OPTION)/PWA-F-ADU (CN212) (OPTION)/
MAIN MOTOR

CN708 PS-ACC (CN708) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN6)/

RADF (CN1) (OPTION)

CN1

PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14)

CN2

PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR

CN7

PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)

CN9

PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)

CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> SLG-FAN-MOT, 

APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3, APS4, APS5

CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT

CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)

CN2

INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO

J422

PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL

J423

PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT

J424

PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL

J425

PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)

J426

PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429)

J2

PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201)

CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202)

CN721 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> HVT-MAIN

CN722 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> HVT-GRID

CN723 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> HVT-DEV

CN724 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> HVT-TR

CN725 PS-HVT (OUT5) <-> HVT-SEP

CN726 PS-HVT (OUT6) <-> HVT-GB/RGT-ROL

CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR

CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR

CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT

CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW

CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)

CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)

CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)

CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)

CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)

J600

IPC (J600) <-> FINISHER (J598) (OPTION)

(PCI BUS)PARALLEL BOARD <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284-C)

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

+24VD2

+24 V

-

A2

CTRON

Total counter ON signal

-

A3

CTRCNT

Copy key card connection detection signal

L

A4

M/C RUN

M/C run signal

L

A5

EXTCTR

Exit sensor ON signal

L

A6

PG

Power ground

-

A7

BKCTR

Black and white mode counter ON signal and 
CST-CTR signal

-

A8

MNCTR

Mono-color mode counter ON signal

-

B1

FLCTR

Full color mode counter ON signal and reverse 
side counter signal

-

B2

SG

Signal ground

-

B3

TSIZE3

Paper size signal-3

-

B4

TSIZE2

Paper size signal-2

-

B5

TSIZE1

Paper size signal-1

-

B6

TSIZE0

Paper size signal-0

-

B7

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B8

CTRCNT2

Copy key card /Coin counter judgment signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

NC

Not connected

-

2

SG

Signal ground

3

KCTRC-0

Key copy counter/Copy key card connection 
detection signal

L

4

+24VD2

+24 V

-

5

KCTRO-0

Key copy counter ON signal

-

6

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

ATSCNT-1

PU connection detection signal

L

A2

ERSLP-0A

Exposure lamp drive signal

-

A3

+24VD1

+24 V

-

A4

PG

Power ground

-

A5

ATS-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A6

+24VD1

+24 V (Auto-toner sensor)

-

A7

ATSVR-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A8

DRTH-1

Drum thermistor detection signal

Analog

A9

SG

Signal ground

-

A10

SG

Signal ground

-

B1

RSTSW-0A

Reset signal to the main switch

H

B2

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B4

HMS-1A

Humidity sensor signal

Analog

B5

SG

Signal ground

-

B6

TEMP-1

Temperature sensor signal

Analog

B7

FCOVSW-1

Front cover opening/closing switch signal

-

B8

SG

Signal ground

-

B9

NC

Not connected

-

B10

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

ATSCNT-1

PU connection detection signal

L

A2

ERSLP-0A

Exposure lamp drive signal

-

A3

+24VD1

+24 V

-

A4

PG

Power ground

-

A5

ATS-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A6

+24VD1

+24 V (Auto-toner sensor)

-

A7

ATSVR-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A8

DRTH-1

Drum thermistor detection signal

Analog

A9

SG

Signal ground

-

A10

SG

Signal ground

-

A11

NC

Not connected

-

B1

NC

Not connected

-

B2

RSTSW-0A

Reset signal to the main switch

H

B3

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B4

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B5

HMS-1A

Humidity sensor signal

Analog

B6

SG

Signal ground

-

B7

TEMP-1

Temperature sensor signal

Analog

B8

FCOVSW-1

Front cover opening/closing switch signal

-

B9

SG

Signal ground

-

B10

NC

Not connected

-

B11

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

ATSCNT-1

PU connection detection signal

L

A2

ERSLP-0A

Exposure lamp drive signal

-

A3

+24VD1

+24 V

-

A4

PG

Power ground

-

A5

ATS-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A6

+24VD1

+24 V (Auto-toner sensor)

-

A7

ATSVR-1A

Auto-toner sensor detection signal

Analog

A8

DRTH-1

Drum thermistor detection signal

Analog

A9

SG

Signal ground

-

A10

SG

Signal ground

-

A11

NC

Not connected

-

A12

NC

Not connected

-

B1

CPSW2-0

Not used

-

B2

SG

Signal ground

-

B3

RSTSW-0A

Reset signal to the main switch

H

B4

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B5

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B6

HMS-1A

Humidity sensor signal

Analog

B7

SG

Signal ground

-

B8

TEMP-1

Temperature sensor signal

Analog

B9

FCOVSW-1

Front cover opening/closing switch signal

L

B10

SG

Signal ground

-

B11

NC

Not connected

-

B12

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

ADM1D-0A

ADU motor drive signal-D

-

A2

ADM1B-0A

ADU motor drive signal-B

-

A3

ADM1C-0A

ADU motor drive signal-C

-

A4

ADM1A-0A

ADU motor drive signal-A

-

A5

ADUVR-1

ADU motor current control reference voltage

-

A6

ADTR2-1

ADU exit sensor detection signal

-

A7

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A8

SG

Signal ground

-

A9

ADCNT-1

ADU connection detection signal

L

A10

ADTR1-1

ADU entrance sensor detection signal

L

A11

ADCOV-1

ADU opening/closing switch detection signal

-

A12

+24VD2

+24 V

-

A13

ADUCL-0A

ADU clutch drive signal

L

A14

SG

Signal ground

L

A15

CSTCSW-1

Side cover opening/closing sensor detection signal

L

A16

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A17

NC

Not connected

-

A18

NC

Not connected

-

A19

NC

Not connected

-

A20

NC

Not connected

-

B1

SFSZ3-0

Not used

-

B2

SG

Signal ground

-

B3

SG

Signal ground

-

B4

SFSZ0-0

Bypass paper size detection signal-1

-

B5

SFSZ1-0

Bypass paper size detection signal-2

-

B6

SFSZ2-0

Bypass paper size detection signal-3

-

B7

SG

Signal ground

-

B8

SFBEMP-1

Bypass paper detection signal

-

B9

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B10

+24VD2

+24 V

-

B11

SFBCL1-0

Bypass feed clutch drive signal

L

B12

+24VD2

+24 V

-

B13

SFBCL2-0

Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal

-

B14

SG

Signal ground

-

B15

SFBTRY-1

Not used

-

B16

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B17

SG

Signal ground

-

B18

2NDFED-1

2nd transport sensor detection signal

-

B19

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B20

SFBCNT-1

Bypass unit connection detection signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

SG

Signal ground

A2

1STFEED-1

1st transport sensor detection signal

A3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

A4

SG

Signal ground

A5

PSTPSW-1

Registration sensor detection signal

-

A6

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A7

SG

Signal ground

-

A8

SDCSW-1

Transfer cover opening/closing detection signal

-

A9

NC

Not connected

-

A10

TNRSW-1

Toner cartridge installation detection signal

-

A11

SG

Signal ground

-

A12

TNRFULL-1

Cleaner auger lock detection signal

-

A13

SG

Signal ground

-

A14

TNRMT-0A

Toner motor drive signal

-

A15

TNRMT-1A

Toner motor drive signal

-

A16

NC

Not connected

-

A17

NC

Not connected

-

B1

RGTCL-0A

Registration roller clutch drive signal

-

B2

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B3

1STCLL-0A

Middle transport clutch drive signal

-

B4

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B5

1STCLH-0A

Upper transport clutch drive signal

-

B6

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B7

MAMBK-0A

Main motor brake signal

L: Braking
H: Normal

B8

MAMPL-1

Main motor PLL signal

L: Normal

B9

MAMCW-0A

Main motor rotational direction signal

L: CW, 

H: CCW

B10

MAMCK-1

Main motor reference clock signal

-

B11

MAMON-0A

Main motor ON/OFF signal

L: ON, 

H: OFF

B12

SG

Signal ground

-

B13

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B14

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B15

PWRFN-0A

Internal cooling fan2 motor drive signal

-

B16

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B17

CLNFN-0A

Internal cooling fan1 motor drive signal

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

+24VD2

+24 V

A2

EXTMA-0A

Exit motor drive signal-A

A3

EXTMB-0A

Exit motor drive signal-B

A4

EXTMC-0A

Exit motor drive signal-C

A5

EXTMD-0A

Exit motor drive signal-D

A6

+24VD2

+24 V

-

A7

+24VD2

+24 V

-

A8

VCMFN-0

Exhaust fan motor drive signal

-

A9

NC

Not connected

-

A10

NC

Not connected

-

A11

NC

Not connected

-

A12

NC

Not connected

-

A13

NC

Not connected

-

A14

NC

Not connected

-

A15

NC

Not connected

-

A16

NC

Not connected

-

A17

NC

Not connected

-

A18

NC

Not connected

-

B1

RLC2S-1

JSP/OCT unit exit sensor signal

-

B2

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B3

RLHSW-1

JSP: lower stack sensor detection signal / 
OCT: stack sensor detection signal

-

B4

SG

Signal ground

-

B5

JSPSW-0

JSP/OCT judgment signal

L

B6

RLCNT-0

JSP/OCT judgment signal

-

B7

OPCHK1-1

JSP/OCT judgment signal

L: OCT, 

H: JSP

B8

RLCSW-1

JSP/OCT cover opening/closing detection signal

L

B9

RLTRS-1

JSP: paper jam sensor detection signal / 
OCT: paper feed sensor detection signal

-

B10

JFSL2OH-1

JSP: upper stack sensor detection signal / 
OCT: separate sensor detection signal

-

B11

GASOL-0A

JSP/OCT gate solenoid driving signal

-

B12

+24VD2

+24 V

-

B13

PG

Power ground

-

B14

OFFSET1

OCT motor drive signal-1

-

B15

OFFSET2

OCT motor drive signal-2

-

B16

NC

Not connected

-

B17

NC

Not connected

-

B18

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

SG

Signal ground

-

A2

CUEMP-1

Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal

-

A3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A4

SG

Signal ground

-

A5

CUTOP-1

Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal

-

A6

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A7

CURGC-0A

Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal

-

A8

+24VD1

+24 V

-

A9

SG

Signal ground

-

A10

CUFLS-1

Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal

-

A11

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A12

CLTRM-0A

Tray-up motor drive signal

-

A13

CLTRM-1A

Tray-up motor drive signal

-

A14

2NDCL-0A

Lower transport clutch drive signal

-

A15

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B1

SG

Signal ground

-

B2

CLEMP-1

Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal

-

B3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B4

SG

Signal ground

-

B5

CLTOP-1

Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal

-

B6

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B7

CLRGC-0

Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal

-

B8

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B9

SG

Signal ground

-

B10

CLFLS-1

Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal

-

B11

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

B12

SG

Signal ground

-

B13

CUSW-0

Upper drawer detection signal

-

B14

SG

Signal ground

-

B15

CLSW-0

Lower drawer detection signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

HVCLK-0A

Developer AC bias high-voltage clock signal

-

A2

HVSDWN-1A

High-voltage power supply leakage detection signal

L

A3

HVSAV-1A

Separation bias voltage output reference voltage

Analog

A4

HVTSP-0A

Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal

-

A5

HVTGB-0A

Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal

-

A6

HVTVR-1A

Transfer bias high-voltage output reference voltage

Analog

A7

HVTT-0A

Transfer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal

-

A8

HVAVR-1A

Developer AC bias high-voltage output reference 
voltage

Analog

A9

HVTAC-0A

Developer AC bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal

-

A10

HVDVR-1A

Developer DC bias high-voltage output reference 
voltage

Analog

A11

HVMVR-1A

Main charger grid output reference voltage

Analog

A12

HVTM-0A

Main needle electrode charger voltage ON/OFF 
signal

-

A13

SG

Signal ground

-

A14

+24VD2

+24 V

B1

FUSSW-1A

Fuser roller thermistor connection detection signal

-

B2

MTH+-1A

Fuser roller center ther signal

Analog

B3

MTH--1A

Fuser roller center thermistor - signal

Analog

B4

STH+-1A

Fuser roller side ther signal

Analog

B5

STH--1A

Fuser roller side thermistor - signal

Analog

B6

ETH+-1A

Fuser roller edge ther signal

Analog

B7

ETH--1A

Fuser roller edge thermistor - signal

Analog

B8

+5.1VSW

+5.1 V

-

B9

SG

Signal ground

-

B10

EXTSW-1

Exit sensor detection signal

-

B11

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

B12

NC

Not connected

-

B13

NC

Not connected

-

B14

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

CLKC-1A

PFP/LCF driver control latch signal (C)

-

A2

CLKB-1A

PFP/LCF driver control latch signal (B)

-

A3

SCSWC-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection port enable signal (C)

-

A4

DRV7-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A5

DRV6-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A6

DRV5-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A7

DRV4-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A8

DRV3-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A9

DRV2-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A10

DRV1-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A11

DRV0-1A

PFP/LCF driver control signal

-

A12

PFRST-0

Reset signal

-

A13

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A14

SG

Signal ground

-

A15

+24VD1

+24 V

-

A16

+24VD1

+24 V

-

B1

PG

Power ground

-

B2

PG

Power ground

-

B3

SIZE0-0A

Size data bus-0

-

B4

SIZE1-0A

Size data bus-1

-

B5

SIZE2-0A

Size data bus-2

-

B6

SIZE3-0A

Size data bus-3

-

B7

RETS0-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B8

RETS1-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B9

RETS2-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B10

RETS3-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B11

RETS4-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B12

RETS5-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B13

RETS6-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B14

RETS7-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection signal

-

B15

SCSWB-0A

PFP/LCF sensor detection port enable signal (B)

-

B16

LCCNT-0

LCF connection detection signal

L

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

POMCK-0

Polygonal motor reference clock signal

-

2

POMOL-0

Polygonal motor PLL signal

L: Normal

3

POMON-0

Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal

L: ON 

H: OFF

4

PG

Power ground

-

5

+24VD1

+24 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

+5VD

+5.1 V

-

3

+5VD

+5.1 V

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

WRLVL-1

Laser power control signal (reference voltage)

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

BDIN-1

Laser beam position detection signal (H-sync)

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

PIDT-1

Laser image data (differential )

-

10

PIDT-0

Laser image data (differential signal -)

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

WRAPC-0

APC write signal

-

13

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

14

SHDWM-1

Laser shut down signal

-

15

SG

Signal ground

-

16

+5.1VD

+5.1 V

17

+5.1VD

+5.1 V

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

D[0]

ROM data bus [0]

-

2

D[2]

ROM data bus [2]

-

3

D[4]

ROM data bus [4]

-

4

D[6]

ROM data bus [6]

-

5

RD-0

ROM data read signal

-

6

A[0]

ROM address bus [0]

-

7

A[2]

ROM address bus [2]

-

8

A[4]

ROM address bus [4]

-

9

A[6]

ROM address bus [6]

-

10

A[8]

ROM address bus [8]

-

11

A[10]

ROM address bus [10]

-

12

A[12]

ROM address bus [12]

-

13

A[14]

ROM address bus [14]

-

14

A[16]

ROM address bus [16]

-

15

A[18]

ROM address bus [18]

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

D[1]

ROM data bus [1]

-

19

D[3]

ROM data bus [3]

-

20

D[5]

ROM data bus [5]

-

21

D[7]

ROM data bus [7]

-

22

CS2-0

Chip select signal

L

23

A[1]

ROM address bus [1]

-

24

A[3]

ROM address bus [3]

-

25

A[5]

ROM address bus [5]

-

26

A[7]

ROM address bus [7]

-

27

A[9]

ROM address bus [9]

-

28

A[11]

ROM address bus [11]

-

29

A[13]

ROM address bus [13]

-

30

A[15]

ROM address bus [15]

-

31

A[17]

ROM address bus [17]

-

32

ROMDT-0

Download board connection detection signal

L

33

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

34

LED-0A

External ROM loading status signal

L

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

3

AD0

System address bus [0]

-

4

AD2

System address bus [2]

-

5

AD4

System address bus [4]

-

6

AD6

System address bus [6]

-

7

I/O0

System data bus [0]

-

8

I/O2

System data bus [2]

-

9

I/O4

System data bus [4]

-

10

I/O6

System data bus [6]

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

WE

Write signal

-

13

CSIP2-0A

IPC chip select signal

-

14

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

15

IPCSW-0

IPC board connection detection signal

L

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

18

AD1

System address bus [1]

-

19

AD3

System address bus [3]

-

20

AD5

System address bus [5]

-

21

AD7

System address bus [7]

-

22

I/O1

System data bus [1]

-

23

I/O3

System data bus [3]

-

24

I/O5

System data bus [5]

-

25

I/O7

System data bus [7]

-

26

SG

Signal ground

-

27

OE

Output enable signal

-

28

IPRST-0A

IPC reset signal

-

29

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

30

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

DATA0

System data bus [0]

-

2

DATA2

System data bus [2]

-

3

DATA4

System data bus [4]

-

4

DATA6

System data bus [6]

-

5

DATA8

System data bus [8]

-

6

DATA10

System data bus [10]

-

7

DATA12

System data bus [12]

-

8

DATA14

System data bus [14]

-

9

A21

System address bus [21]

-

10

A19

System address bus [19]

-

11

A17

System address bus [17]

-

12

A15

System address bus [15]

-

13

A13

System address bus [13]

-

14

A11

System address bus [11]

-

15

A09

System address bus [9]

-

16

A07

System address bus [7]

-

17

A05

System address bus [5]

-

18

A03

System address bus [3]

-

19

RDX

System read signal

-

20

CS7-A

Chip select signal (7-A)

-

21

CS7-B

Chip select signal (7-B)

-

22

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

23

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

24

SG

Signal ground

-

25

SG

Signal ground

-

26

DATA1

System data bus [1]

-

27

DATA3

System data bus [3]

-

28

DATA5

System data bus [5]

-

29

DATA7

System data bus [7]

-

30

DATA9

System data bus [9]

-

31

DATA11

System data bus [11]

-

32

DATA13

System data bus [13]

-

33

DATA15

System data bus [15]

-

34

A20

System address bus [20]

-

35

A18

System address bus [18]

-

36

A16

System address bus [16]

-

37

A14

System address bus [14]

-

38

A12

System address bus [12]

-

39

A10

System address bus [10]

-

40

A08

System address bus [8]

-

41

A06

System address bus [6]

-

42

A04

System address bus [4]

-

43

A02

System address bus [2]

-

44

DWNLED

External ROM loading status signal

-

45

/CS0

System chip select signal-0

-

46

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

47

RMSL

System control signal

-

48

/WRX

System write signal

-

49

SG

Signal ground

-

50

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

2

DA1

Address bus [1]

-

3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

4

DD0

FAX data bus [0]

-

5

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

6

DD3

FAX data bus [3]

-

7

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

8

DD6

FAX data bus [6]

-

9

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

10

DD9

FAX data bus [9]

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

DD12

FAX data bus [12]

-

13

SG

Signal ground

-

14

SG

Signal ground

-

15

SG

Signal ground

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

19

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

20

INTRQ

Interrupt request signal

-

21

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

22

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

23

-12VB

-12 V

-

24

SG

Analog ground

-

25

+12VB

+12 V

-

26

DA0

Address bus [0]

-

27

DA2

Address bus [2]

-

28

IDECS

IDE chip select signal

-

29

DD1

FAX data bus [1]

-

30

DD2

FAX data bus [2]

-

31

DD4

FAX data bus [4]

-

32

DD5

FAX data bus [5]

-

33

DD7

FAX data bus [7]

-

34

DD8

FAX data bus [8]

-

35

DD10

FAX data bus [10]

-

36

DD11

FAX data bus [11]

-

37

DD13

FAX data bus [13]

-

38

DD14

FAX data bus [14]

-

39

DD15

FAX data bus [15]

-

40

/DIOR

Data read signal

-

41

/DIOW

Data write signal

-

42

/DMACK

DMA acknowledge signal

-

43

/DLDCS0

Chip select signal

-

44

/RESET

Reset signal

L

45

DMARQ

DMA request signal

-

46

NC

Not connected

-

47

FXWP

FAX wake-up signal

-

48

SG

Signal ground

-

49

SG

Signal ground

-

50

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SYSRST

System reset signal

-

2

SCTS

Transmission enabled

-

3

STXD

Transmitted SLG data

-

4

SRXD

Received SLG data

-

5

SRTS

Transmission request signal

-

6

SCNT

SLG board connection detection signal

-

7

SG

Signal ground

-

8

SVDEN

Vertical scanning synchronized signal

-

9

SDCLK

Clock signal for scanning data transmission

-

10

SHDEN

Horizontal scanning synchronized signal 

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

SCD7

Scanning data [7]

-

14

SCD6

Scanning data [6]

-

15

SCD5

Scanning data [5]

-

16

SCD4

Scanning data [4]

-

17

SCD3

Scanning data [3]

-

18

SCD2

Scanning data [2]

-

19

SCD1

Scanning data [1]

-

20

SCD0

Scanning data [0]

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

/RESET

Reset signal

-

2

SG

Signal ground

-

3

DD7

Data bus [7]

-

4

DD8

Data bus [8]

-

5

DD6

Data bus [6]

-

6

DD9

Data bus [9]

-

7

DD5

Data bus [5]

-

8

DD10

Data bus [10]

-

9

DD4

Data bus [4]

-

10

DD11

Data bus [11]

-

11

DD3

Data bus [3]

-

12

DD12

Data bus [12]

-

13

DD2

Data bus [2]

-

14

DD13

Data bus [13]

-

15

DD1

Data bus [1]

-

16

DD14

Data bus [14]

-

17

DD0

Data bus [0]

-

18

DD15

Data bus [15]

-

19

SG

Signal ground

-

20

NC(KEY)

Not connected

-

21

MDARQ

DMA request signal

H

22

SG

Signal ground

-

23

/DIOW

I/O write signal

-

24

SG

Signal ground

-

25

/DIOR

I/O read signal

-

26

SG

Signal ground

-

27

IORDY

I/O ready signal

-

28

SG

Signal ground

-

29

/DMACK

DMA acknowledge signal

L

30

SG

Signal ground

-

31

INTRQ

Interrupt request signal

H

32

NC(RESERV
ED)

Reserve signal

-

33

DA1

Device address [1]

-

34

/PDIAG

Passed diagnostics

L

35

DA0

Device address [0]

-

36

DA2

Device address [2]

-

37

/CS0

Chip select-0

L

38

/CS1

Chip select-1

L

39

/DASP

Device active or slave present signal

L

40

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+12V

+12 V

-

2

SG

Signal ground

-

3

SG

Signal ground

-

4

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

DQ0

Memory data bus [0]

-

3

DQ1

Memory data bus [1]

-

4

DQ2

Memory data bus [2]

-

5

DQ3

Memory data bus [3]

-

6

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

7

DQ4

Memory data bus [4]

-

8

DQ5

Memory data bus [5]

-

9

DQ6

Memory data bus [6]

-

10

DQ7

Memory data bus [7]

-

11

DQ8

Memory data bus [8]

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

DQ9

Memory data bus [9]

-

14

DQ10

Memory data bus [10]

-

15

DQ11

Memory data bus [11]

-

16

DQ12

Memory data bus [12]

-

17

DQ13

Memory data bus [13]

-

18

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

19

DQ14

Memory data bus [14]

-

20

DQ15

Memory data bus [15]

-

21

NC

Not connected

-

22

NC

Not connected

-

23

SG

Signal ground

-

24

NC

Not connected

-

25

NC

Not connected

-

26

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

27

/WE

Data write enable signal

-

28

DQMB0

Output disable/write mask-0

-

29

DQMB1

Output disable/write mask-1

-

30

/CS0

Chip select signal-0

-

31

NC

Not connected

-

32

SG

Signal ground

-

33

A0

Memory address bus [0]

-

34

A2

Memory address bus [1]

-

35

A4

Memory address bus [2]

-

36

A6

Memory address bus [3]

-

37

A8

Memory address bus [4]

-

38

A10

Memory address bus [10]

-

39

BA1

Bank select-1

-

40

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

41

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

42

CLK0

Clock-0 input

-

43

SG

Signal ground

-

44

NC

Not connected

-

45

/CS2

Chip select signal-2

-

46

DQMB2

Output disable/write mask-2

-

47

DQMB3

Output disable/write mask-3

-

48

NC

Not connected

-

49

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

50

NC

Not connected

-

51

NC

Not connected

-

52

NC

Not connected

-

53

NC

Not connected

-

54

SG

Signal ground

-

55

DQ16

Memory data bus [16]

-

56

DQ17

Memory data bus [17]

-

57

DQ18

Memory data bus [18]

-

58

DQ19

Memory data bus [19]

-

59

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

60

DQ20

Memory data bus [20]

-

61

NC

Not connected

-

62

NC

Not connected

-

63

CKE1

Clock enable signal

-

64

SG

Not connected

-

65

DQ21

Memory data bus [21]

-

66

DQ22

Memory data bus [22]

-

67

DQ23

Memory data bus [23]

-

68

SG

Signal ground

-

69

DQ24

Memory data bus [24]

-

70

DQ25

Memory data bus [25]

-

71

DQ26

Memory data bus [26]

-

72

DQ27

Memory data bus [27]

-

73

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

74

DQ28

Memory data bus [28]

-

75

DQ29

Memory data bus [29]

-

76

DQ30

Memory data bus [30]

-

77

DQ31

Memory data bus [31]

-

78

SG

Signal ground

-

79

CLK2

Clock-2 input

-

80

NC

Not connected

-

81

NC(WP)

Not connected

-

82

SDA

PD serial data

-

83

SCL

PD serial clock

-

84

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

85

SG

Signal ground

-

86

DQ32

Memory data bus [32]

-

87

DQ33

Memory data bus [33]

-

88

DQ34

Memory data bus [34]

-

89

DQ35

Memory data bus [35]

-

90

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

91

DQ36

Memory data bus [36]

-

92

DQ37

Memory data bus [37]

-

93

DQ38

Memory data bus [38]

-

94

DQ39

Memory data bus [39]

-

95

DQ40

Memory data bus [40]

-

96

SG

Signal ground

-

97

DQ41

Memory data bus [41]

-

98

DQ42

Memory data bus [42]

-

99

DQ43

Memory data bus [43]

-

100

DQ44

Memory data bus [44]

-

101

DQ45

Memory data bus [45]

-

102

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

103

DQ46

Memory data bus [46]

-

104

DQ47

Memory data bus [47]

-

105

NC

Not connected

-

106

NC

Not connected

-

107

SG

Signal ground

-

108

NC

Not connected

-

109

NC

Not connected

-

110

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

111

/CAS

Column address strobe signal

-

112

DQMB4

Output disable/write mask-4

-

113

DQMB5

Output disable/write mask-5

-

114

/CS1

Chip select signal-1

-

115

/RAS

Row address strobe signal

-

116

SG

Signal ground

-

117

A1

Memory address bus [1]

-

118

A3

Memory address bus [3]

-

119

A5

Memory address bus [5]

-

120

A7

Memory address bus [7]

-

121

A9

Memory address bus [9]

-

122

BA0

Bank select-0

-

123

A11

Memory address bus [11]

-

124

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

125

NC(CLK1)

Clock-1 input

-

126

A12

Memory address bus [12]

-

127

SG

Signal ground

-

128

CEK

Clock enable signal

-

129

/CS3

Chip select signal-3

-

130

DQMB6

Output disable/write mask-6

-

131

DQMB7

Output disable/write mask-7

-

132

NC(A13)

Memory address bus [13]

-

133

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

134

NC

Not connected

-

135

NC

Not connected

-

136

NC

Not connected

-

137

NC

Not connected

-

138

SG

Signal ground

-

139

DQ48

Memory data bus [48]

-

140

DQ49

Memory data bus [49]

-

141

DQ50

Memory data bus [50]

-

142

DQ51

Memory data bus [51]

-

143

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

144

DQ52

Memory data bus [52]

-

145

NC

Not connected

-

146

NC

Not connected

-

147

NC

Not connected

-

148

SG

Signal ground

-

149

DQ53

Memory data bus [53]

-

150

DQ54

Memory data bus [54]

-

151

DQ55

Memory data bus [55]

-

152

SG

Signal ground

-

153

DQ56

Memory data bus [56]

-

154

DQ57

Memory data bus [57]

-

155

DQ58

Memory data bus [58]

-

156

DQ59

Memory data bus [59]

-

157

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

158

DQ60

Memory data bus [60]

-

159

DQ61

Memory data bus [61]

-

160

DQ62

Memory data bus [62]

-

161

DQ63

Memory data bus [63]

-

162

SG

Signal ground

-

163

NC(CLK3)

Clock-3 input

-

164

NC

Not connected

-

165

SA0

PD address [0]

-

166

SA1

PD address [1]

-

167

SA2

PD address [2]

-

168

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

A1

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

A2

CBSY-0

System command busy

-

A3

CMD-0

Command data

-

A4

SACK-0

System status acknowledge signal

-

A5

SERR-0

System status error signal

-

A6

SBSY-0

System status busy signal

-

A7

STS-0

Status data

-

A8

CACK-0

System command acknowledge signal

-

A9

CERR-0

System command error signal

-

A10

SG

Signal ground

-

A11

SG

Signal ground 

-

A12

SG

Signal ground

-

A13

IRCLK-1

Clock signal input for image data transmission

-

A14

SG

Signal ground

-

A15

IHSYNC-0

Horizontal scanning synchronized signal

-

A16

SG

Signal ground

-

A17

IVSYNC-0

Vertical scanning synchronized signal

-

B1

MCNT

LGC board connection detection signal

-

B2

SYSRST-0

System reset signal

L

B3

IDATX[0]

IDA Transmitted data bus [0]

-

B4

IDATX[1]

IDA Transmitted data bus [1]

-

B5

IDATX[2]

IDA Transmitted data bus [2]

-

B6

IDATX[3]

IDA Transmitted data bus [3]

-

B7

IDATX[4]

IDA Transmitted data bus [4]

-

B8

IDATX[5]

IDA Transmitted data bus [5]

-

B9

IDATX[6]

IDA Transmitted data bus [6]

-

B10

IDATX[7]

IDA Transmitted data bus [7]

-

B11

SG

Signal ground

-

B12

IDCLK-1

Clock signal output for image data transmission

-

B13

SG

Signal ground

-

B14

IHDEN-0

Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction

-

B15

SG

Signal ground

-

B16

IVDEN-0

Data enable of the vertical scanning direction

-

B17

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

XSCL-1A

LCD data transmission clock

-

2

LP-1A

LCD data latch pulse

H

3

WF-1A

LCD frame signal

H

4

YD-1A

LCD scanning line start signal

H

5

INVGND

Signal ground

-

6

BZON-0A

Buzzer-ON signal

L

7

CPPOW-1A

Panel connection detection signal

H

8

LDCLK-1A

LED serial clock

-

9

LDDAT-1A

LED serial data 

-

10

LDLTH-1A

LED data latch signal

L

11

LDON1-0A

LED drive selection signal-1

L

12

LDON0-0A

LED drive selection signal-0

L

13

SG

Signal ground

-

14

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

15

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

16

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

17

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

18

CPRST-0A

Reset signal

L

19

SG

Signal ground

-

20

RTS0-0A

Key controller SIO Transmission request signal

-

21

CTS0-0A

Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal

-

22

SOUT(0)

Key controller SIO transmitted serial data

-

23

SIN(0)

Key controller SIO received serial data

-

24

SG

Signal ground

-

25

UD3-1A

LCD display data-3

-

26

UD2-1A

LCD display data-2

-

27

UD1-1A

LCD display data-1

-

28

UD0-1A

LCD display data-0

-

29

SG

Signal ground

-

30

LCDEN-1A

LCD enable signal

H

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

VBUS

(+5.1 V)

-

2

D-

USB serial data

-

3

D+

USB serial data

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

VBUS

+5.1 V

-

2

D-

USB serial data

-

3

D+

USB serial data

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

VBUS

+5.1 V

-

6

D-

USB serial data

-

7

D+

USB serial data

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

2

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

3

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

4

NC (/CS2P)

Not connected

-

5

D15

I/F data bus [15]

-

6

D14

I/F data bus [14]

-

7

D13

I/F data bus [13]

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

D12

I/F data bus [12]

-

10

D11

I/F data bus [11]

-

11

D10

I/F data bus [10]

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

D09

I/F data bus [9]

-

14

D08

I/F data bus [8]

-

15

/INTPR1

Interrupt PR1 signal

L

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

A03

I/F address bus [3]

-

18

A02

I/F address bus [2]

-

19

A01

I/F address bus [1]

-

20

NC (SRXD)

Not connected

-

21

A00

I/F address bus [0]

-

22

D07

I/F data bus [7]

-

23

D06

I/F data bus [6]

-

24

A15

I/F address bus [15]

-

25

D05

I/F data bus [5]

-

26

A14

I/F address bus [14]

-

27

D04

I/F data bus [4]

-

28

A13

I/F address bus [13]

-

29

D03

I/F data bus [3]

-

30

A12

I/F address bus [12]

-

31

D02

I/F data bus [2]

-

32

A11

I/F address bus [11]

-

33

D01

I/F data bus [1]

-

34

A10

I/F address bus [10]

-

35

D00

I/F data bus [0]

-

36

A09

I/F address bus [9]

-

37

A04

I/F address bus [4]

-

38

A08

I/F address bus [8]

-

39

/RESET

System reset signal

-

40

A07

I/F address bus [7]

-

41

/ACK

Acknowledge signal

-

42

A06

I/F address bus [6]

-

43

/CSP1

Chip select signal

-

44

A05

I/F address bus [5]

-

45

NC (OEO)

Not connected

-

46

NC (STXD)

Not connected

-

47

RW

Read/write to NIC

-

48

SG

Signal ground

-

49

A16

I/F address bus [16]

-

50

SG

Signal ground

-

51

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

52

SG

Signal ground

-

53

NC (DACK)

Not connected

-

54

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

55

/INTPR2

PR2 interrupt signal

-

56

SG

Signal ground

-

57

BRDNIN

NIC board connection detection signal

-

58

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

59

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

60

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

2

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

3

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

-12VA

-12 V

-

6

-12VA

-12 V

-

7

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

8

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

9

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

10

OPBINT(2)

Interrupt request-2

-

11

OPBINT(0)

Interrupt request-0

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

PCICLK(5)

PCI clock-5 (Not used)

-

14

SG

Signal ground

-

15

PCICLK(3)

PCI clock-3

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

REQ(1)#

Data request signal-1

-

18

REQ(0)#

Data request signal-0

-

19

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

20

AD[31]

PCI address/data bus [31]

-

21

AD[29]

PCI address/data bus [29]

-

22

SG

Signal ground

-

23

AD[27]

PCI address/data bus [27]

-

24

AD[25]

PCI address/data bus [25]

-

25

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

26

C/BE(3]#

Command and byte enable-3

-

27

AD[23]

PCI address/data bus [23]

-

28

SG

Signal ground

-

29

AD[21]

PCI address/data bus [21]

-

30

AD[19]

PCI address/data bus [19]

-

31

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

32

AD[17]

PCI address/data bus [17]

-

33

C/BE(2)#

Command and byte enable-2

-

34

SG

Signal ground

-

35

IRDY#

Initiator ready

L

36

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

37

DEVSEL#

Device select

L

38

SG

Signal ground

-

39

LOCK#

Lock

L

40

PERR#

Data parity Error

L

41

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

42

SERR#

System Error

L

43

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

44

C/BE(1)#

Command and byte enable-1

-

45

AD[14]

PCI address/data bus [14]

-

46

SG

Signal ground

-

47

AD[12]

PCI address/data bus [12]

-

48

AD[10]

PCI address/data bus [10]

-

49

M66EN

PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal

-

50

SG

Signal ground

-

51

AD[8]

PCI address/data bus [8]

-

52

AD[7]

PCI address/data bus [7]

-

53

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

54

AD[5]

PCI address/data bus [5]

-

55

AD[3]

PCI address/data bus [3]

-

56

SG

Signal ground

-

57

AD[1]

PCI address/data bus [1]

-

58

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

59

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

60

SG

Signal ground

-

61

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

62

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

63

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

64

SG

Signal ground

-

65

+12VA

+12 V

-

66

+12VA

+12 V

-

67

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

68

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

69

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

70

OPBINT(1)

Interrupt request-1

-

71

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

72

PCIRST#

PCI reset signal

-

73

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

74

PCICLK(4)

PCI clock-4

-

75

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

76

GNT(1)#

Grant-1

-

77

GNT(0)#

Grant-0

-

78

SG

Signal ground

-

79

PME#

Power Management Event

-

80

AD[30]

PCI address/data bus [30]

-

81

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

82

AD[28]

PCI address/data bus [28]

-

83

AD[26]

PCI address/data bus [26]

-

84

SG

Signal ground

-

85

AD[24]

PCI address/data bus [24]

-

86

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

87

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

88

AD[22]

PCI address/data bus [22]

-

89

AD[20]

PCI address/data bus [20]

-

90

SG

Ground

-

91

AD[18]

PCI address/data bus [18]

-

92

AD[16]

PCI address/data bus [16]

-

93

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

94

FRAME#

Cycle frame

L

95

SG

Signal ground

-

96

TRDY#

Target ready

L

97

SG

Signal ground

-

98

STOP#

Stop

L

99

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

100

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

101

SG

Signal ground

-

102

SG

Signal ground

-

103

PAR

Parity

-

104

AD[15]

PCI address/data bus [15]

-

105

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

106

AD[13]

PCI address/data bus [13]

-

107

AD[11]

PCI address/data bus [11]

-

108

SG

Signal ground

-

109

AD[9]

PCI address/data bus [9]

-

110

SG

Signal ground

-

111

C/BE(0)#

Command and byte enable-0

-

112

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

113

AD[6]

PCI address/data bus [6]

-

114

AD[4]

PCI address/data bus [4]

-

115

SG

Signal ground

-

116

AD[2]

PCI address/data bus [2]

-

117

AD[0]

PCI address/data bus [0]

-

118

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

119

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

120

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

L/S

Paper size signal

-

2

FULL-C

Full-color mode signal

-

3

MONO-C

Mono-color mode signal

-

4

B/W

Black and white mode signal

-

5

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

PWR-EN

Power supply enable signal

L

2

PWR-DN

AC main power down signal

L

3

-12VB

-12 V

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

+12VB

+12 V

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

+12VA

+12 V

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

-12VA

-12 V

-

10

SG

Signal ground

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

14

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

15

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

16

+3.3VA

+3.3 V

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

19

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

20

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

21

SG

Signal ground

-

22

SG

Signal ground

-

23

SG

Signal ground

-

24

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

25

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

26

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

+5.1VD

+5.1 V

-

3

PG

Power ground

-

4

PG

Power ground

-

5

+24VD2

+24 V

-

6

+24VD2

+24 V

-

7

PG

Power ground

-

8

PG

Power ground

-

9

PG

Power ground

L

10

PG

Power ground

L

11

+24VD1

+24 V

-

12

+24VD1

+24 V

-

13

+24VD1

+24 V

-

14

+24VD1

+24 V

-

15

NC

Not connected

-

16

NC

Not connected

-

17

NC

Not connected

-

18

HTR2ON-1A

Side heater ON/OFF signal of fuser roller

-

19

HTR1ON-1A

Center heater ON/OFF signal of fuser roller

-

20

PSPDWN-1

AC main power down signal

L

21

SG

Signal ground

-

22

+12VB

+12 V

-

23

SG

Signal ground

-

24

SG

Signal ground

-

25

SG

Signal ground (to FUS board)

-

26

+5.1VB

+5.1 V (to FUS board)

-

27

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

28

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

29

SG

Signal ground

-

30

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

PG

Signal ground

-

2

+24VB

+24 V (to FAX board)

-

3

SG

Signal ground

-

4

+5.1VB

+5.1 V (to FINISHER)

-

5

NC

Not connected

-

6

NC

Not connected

-

7

PG

Signal ground

-

8

+24VD5

+24 V (to FINISHER)

-

9

PG

Power ground

-

10

PG

Power ground

-

11

+24VD2

+24 V (to ADU)

-

12

+24VD2

+24 V (to ADU)

-

13

PG

Power ground

-

14

PG

Power ground

-

15

+24VD1

+24 V (to main motor)

-

16

+24VD1

+24 V (to main motor)

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

SG

Signal ground

-

3

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

4

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

5

+5.1VB

+5.1 V (to RADF)

-

6

+5.1VB

+5.1 V (to RADF)

-

7

SG

Signal ground

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

10

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

+12VB

+12 V

-

14

SG

Signal ground

-

15

NC

Not connected

-

16

NC

Not connected

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

19

+24VD4

+24 V

-

20

+24VD4

+24 V

-

21

PG

Power ground

-

22

PG

Power ground

-

23

+24VD3

+24 V (to RADF)

-

24

+24VD3

+24 V (to RADF)

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

2

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

3

SG

Signal ground

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

CCDRS

CCD RS signal

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

CCDCP

CCD CP signal

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

CCDSH

CCD SH signal

-

10

SG

Signal ground

-

11

CCDCK2B

CCD shift clock-2B

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

CCDCK2A

CCD shift clock-2A

-

14

SG

Signal ground

-

15

CCDCK1A

CCD shift clock-1A

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

CCD-EVEN

CCD even data

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

19

CCD-ODD

CCD odd data

-

20

SG

Signal ground

-

21

AG

Analog ground

-

22

AG

Analog ground

-

23

AG

Analog ground

-

24

+12VB

+12 V

-

25

+12VB

+12 V

-

26

+12VB

+12 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

PLTN-1A

Platen sensor detection signal

-

3

+5V

+5.1 V

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

HOME-1A

Carriage home position sensor detection signal

-

6

+5V

+5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

ACK

RADF acknowledge signal

-

2

SCN-STR

VARID signal from RADF

-

3

RXD

Received serial data

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

TXD

RADF transmitted serial data

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

DF-ACK

Acknowledge signal from RADF

-

8

DF-RRQ

Request signal from RADF

-

9

REQ

RADF request signal

-

10

CNT

RADF connection detection signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

PG

Power ground

-

2

PG

Power ground

-

3

LMPON-A

Exposure lamp ON signal

H

4

+24VD4

+24 V

-

5

+24VD4

+24 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

NC

Not connected

-

2

NC

Not connected

-

3

NC

Not connected

-

4

+5VAPS

+5 V

-

5

APSR

Automatic original detection sensor signal

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

+5VAPS

+5 V

-

8

APSC

Automatic original detection sensor signal

-

9

SG

Signal ground

-

10

+5VAPS

+5 V

-

11

APS3

Automatic original detection sensor signal

-

12

SG

Signal ground

-

13

+5VAPS

+5 V

-

14

APS2

Automatic original detection sensor signal

-

15

SG

Signal ground

-

16

+5VAPS

+5 V

-

17

APS1

Automatic original detection sensor signal

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SCNM-BB

Scan motor drive signal-B

-

2

+24VD4

+24 V

-

3

SCNM-B

Scan motor drive signal-B

-

4

SCNM-AB

Scan motor drive signal-A

-

5

+24VD4

+24 V

-

6

SCNM-A

Scan motor drive signal-A

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

MDT[0]

ROM data bus [0]

-

2

MDT[2]

ROM data bus [2]

-

3

MDT[4]

ROM data bus [4]

-

4

MDT[6]

ROM data bus [6]

-

5

MRD

ROM data read signal

-

6

PNLDT[0]

D/L address bus [0]

-

7

PNLDT[1]

D/L address bus [2]

-

8

MAD[4]

ROM address bus [4]

-

9

MAD[6]

ROM address bus [6]

-

10

MAD[8]

ROM address bus [8]

-

11

MAD[10]

ROM address bus [10]

-

12

MAD[12]

ROM address bus [12]

-

13

MAD[14]

ROM address bus [14]

-

14

MAD[16]

ROM address bus [16]

-

15

MAD[18]

ROM address bus [18]

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

MDT[1]

ROM data bus [1]

-

19

MDT[3]

ROM data bus [3]

-

20

MDT[5]

ROM data bus [5]

-

21

MDT[7]

ROM data bus [7]

-

22

PNL_CS

Chip select signal

-

23

PNLDT1

D/L address bus [1]

-

24

PNLDT3

D/L address bus [3]

-

25

MAD[5]

ROM address bus [5]

-

26

MAD[7]

ROM address bus [7]

-

27

MAD[9]

ROM address bus [9]

-

28

MAD[11]

ROM address bus [11]

-

29

MAD[13]

ROM address bus [13]

-

30

MAD[15]

ROM address bus [15]

-

31

MAD[17]

ROM address bus [17]

-

32

ROMDT

ROM connection detection signal

-

33

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

34

LED

LED drive signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

Exposure lamp high-voltage output

-

2

NC

Not connected

-

3

NC

Not connected

-

4

-

Exposure lamp high-voltage output

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

YD

Y-axis touch position detection terminal-D

-

2

KL

X-axis touch position detection terminal-L

-

3

XR

X-axis touch position detection terminal-R

-

4

YU

Y-axis touch position detection terminal-U

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

CCFL+

High-voltage terminal

-

2

NC

Not connected

-

3

CCFL-

High-voltage terminal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

FRAME

LCD scanning line start signal

-

2

LAOD

LCD data latch pulse

-

3

CP

LCD data transmission clock

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

VEE

Ground

-

8

D.OFF

LCD enable signal

-

9

D0

LCD display data-0

-

10

D1

LCD display data-1

-

11

D2

LCD display data-2

-

12

D3

LCD display data-3

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

LDFC-1

LED driver output-1

L

2

LDFC-2

LED driver output-2

L

3

LDFC-4

LED driver output-4

L

4

LDFC-5

LED driver output-5

L

5

LDFC-6

LED driver output-6

L

6

LDFC-7

LED driver output-7

L

7

LDFC-8

LED driver output-8

L

8

LDFC-9

LED driver output-9

L

9

LDFC-10

LED driver output-10

L

10

LDFC-11

LED driver output-11

L

11

LDFC-12

LED driver output-12

L

12

LDFC-13

LED driver output-13

L

13

LDFC-15

LED driver output-15

L

14

LDON0

LED common driver signal-0

H

15

LDON1

LED common driver signal-1

H

16

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SCN15

Button scanning signal-5

-

2

SCN14

Button scanning signal-4

-

3

SCN13

Button scanning signal-3

-

4

SCN12

Button scanning signal-2

-

5

SCN11

Button scanning signal-1

-

6

RET0

Button scanning return signal-0

-

7

RET1

Button scanning return signal-1

-

8

RET2

Button scanning return signal-2

-

9

RET3

Button scanning return signal-3

-

10

RET8

Button scanning return signal-8

-

11

RET9

Button scanning return signal-9

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

(TD+)FA1

Transmitted data +

-

2

(TD-)FA2

Transmitted data -

-

3

(RD+)FA3

Received data +

-

4

FA45

Not used

-

5

FA45

Not used

-

6

(RD-)FA6

Received data -

-

7

FA78

Not used

-

8

FA78

Not used

-

9

NC(MTG)

Not connected

-

10

NC(MTG)

Not connected

-

11

SH

Shield

-

12

SH

Shield

-

13

SH

Shield

-

14

SH

Shield

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

+5.1VD

+ 5.1 V

-

3

+5.1VD

+ 5.1 V

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

WRLVL-1

Laser level control signal (reference voltage)

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

NC

Not used

-

8

SG

Signal ground

-

9

PIDT-1

Laser image data (differential )

-

10

PIDT-0

Laser image data (differential signal -)

-

11

SG

Signal ground

-

12

WRAPC-0

APC write signal

-

13

NC

Not used

-

14

SHDWM-1

Laser shut down signal

-

15

SG

Signal ground

-

16

+5.1VD

+ 5.1 V

-

17

+5.1VD

+ 5.1 V

-

18

SG

Signal ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+5.1VD

+ 5.1 V

-

2

SG

Signal ground

-

3

BDIN-1

Laser beam position detection signal (H-sync)

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to main needle electrode charger

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to main charger grid

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to developer charger bias

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to transfer charger bias

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to separation charger bias

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

-

High-voltage to transfer guide bias and registra-
tion roller bias

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

ADUFL

ADU exit sensor detection signal

-

3

+5.1VB

+ 5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

ADUFU

ADU entrance sensor detection signal

-

3

+5.1VB

+ 5.1 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

+24VD2

+24 V

-

2

FDMA

ADU motor drive signal-A

-

3

FDMB

ADU motor drive signal-B

-

4

FDMC

ADU motor drive signal-C

-

5

FDMD

ADU motor drive signal-D

-

6

+24VD2

+24 V

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

SG

Signal ground

-

2

COVSW

ADU opening/closing detection signal

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

TXOUT

Transmitted FAX data

-

2

RXIN

Received FAX data

-

3

CML

CML relay drive signal

-

4

LD

Dial pulse drive signal

-

5

EXTRG

RG relay drive signal

-

6

ATT3DB

-3 db ATT exchange signal

-

7

RLADJ1

MODEM select signal

-

8

RLADJ2

MODEM select signal

-

9

RGCLK

Ring clock

-

10

AG

Analog ground

-

11

-12VB

-12 V

-

12

AG

Analog ground

-

13

+12VB

+12 V

-

14

+24VB

+24 V

-

15

16Hz

Ring clock

-

16

AG

Analog ground

-

17

CI

Ring signal detection

L

18

ANSDET

FAX data answer detection

L

19

REVA

Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal

L

20

REVB

Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal

L

21

INTHOOK

Internal telephone hook signal

-

22

EXTHOOK

External telephone hook signal

-

23

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

24

AG

Analog ground

-

25

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

26

-12VB

-12 V

-

27

AG

Analog ground

-

28

+12VB

+12 V

-

29

+24VB

+24 V

-

30

PG

Power ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

TXB

Transmitted FAX data

-

2

RXIN

Received FAX data

-

3

CML

CML relay drive signal

-

4

LD

Dial pulse drive signal

-

5

ER/HK

Not used

-

6

ATT3DB

-3 db ATT exchange signal

-

7

RLADJ1

Modem select signal

-

8

RLADJ2

Modem select signal

-

9

RGCLK

Not used

10

AG

Signal ground

-

11

-12VB

-12 V

-

12

AG

Analog ground

-

13

+12VB

+12 V

-

14

NC

Not connected

-

15

16Hz

Not used

-

16

AG

Analog ground

-

17

CI

Ring signal detect

L

18

ANSDET

FAX data answer detection

L

19

REVA

Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal

-

20

REVB

Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal

-

21

NC

Not connected

-

22

NC

Not connected

-

23

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

24

AG

Analog ground

-

25

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

26

-12VB

-12 V

-

27

AG

Analog ground

-

28

+12VB

+12 V

-

29

NC

Not connected

-

30

NC

Not connected

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

-

1

SP+

Speaker output (+)

-

2

SP-

Speaker output (-)

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

TXOUT2

Transmitted data

-

2

+5.1VA

+5.1 V

-

3

+12VB

+12 V

-

4

+3.3VB

+3.3 V

-

5

MOD2DMA-1

Modem 2 DMA signal

-

6

SG

Signal ground

-

7

MEM2CS-0

SRAM chip select signal

-

8

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

9

MEMRD2-0

SRAM data read signal

-

10

CLKOE-1

Clock out enable signal

-

11

TXEN2-1

TX enable signal

-

12

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

13

A[16]

MDM address bus [16]

-

14

A[14]

MDM address bus [14]

-

15

A[12]

MDM address bus [12]

-

16

A[10]

MDM address bus [10]

-

17

A[8]

MDM address bus [8]

-

18

A[6]

MDM address bus [6]

-

19

A[4]

MDM address bus [4]

-

20

A[2]

MDM address bus [2]

-

21

A[0]

MDM address bus [0]

-

22

+5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

23

CEP1RST-0

CEP1 reset signal

-

24

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

25

SG

Signal ground

-

26

CEPCLK

System clock signal

-

27

SG

Signal ground

-

28

D[0]

MDM data bus [0]

-

29

D[2]

MDM data bus [2]

-

30

D[4]

MDM data bus [4]

-

31

D[6]

MDM data bus [6]

-

32

D[8]

MDM data bus [8]

-

33

D[10]

MDM data bus [10]

-

34

D[12]

MDM data bus [12]

-

35

D[14]

MDM data bus [14]

-

36

SG

Signal ground

-

37

MOD2DET-0

Modem 2 detection signal

-

38

SG

Signal ground

-

39

DREQC2-1

Data request signal

-

40

DACKC2-0

Data acknowledge signal

-

41

RXIN2

Received data

-

42

AG

Analog ground

-

43

-12VB

-12 V

-

44

AG

Analog ground

-

45

MOD2INT-1

Modem 2 interrupt signal

-

46

MOD2CS-0

Modem 2 chip select signal

-

47

MOD2RST-0

Modem 2 reset signal

-

48

SG

Signal ground

-

49

RXEN2-1

RX enable signal

-

50

MEMWRH2-0 SRAM high byte write signal

-

51

MEMWRL2-0

SRAM low byte write signal

-

52

A[18]

MDM address bus [18]

-

53

A[17]

MDM address bus [17]

-

54

A[15]

MDM address bus [15]

-

55

A[13]

MDM address bus [13]

-

56

A[11]

MDM address bus [11]

-

57

A[9]

MDM address bus [9]

-

58

A[7]

MDM address bus [7]

-

59

A[5]

MDM address bus [5]

-

60

A[3]

MDM address bus [3]

-

61

A[1]

MDM address bus [1]

-

62

CPURST-0

CPU reset signal

-

63

CEP2INT-1

CEP2 interrupt signal

-

64

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

65

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

66

IORD2-0

MDM data read signal

-

67

IOWR2-0

MDM data write signal

-

68

D[1]

MDM data bus [1]

-

69

D[3]

MDM data bus [3]

-

70

D[5]

MDM data bus [5]

-

71

D[7]

MDM data bus [7]

-

72

D[9]

MDM data bus [9]

-

73

D[11]

MDM data bus [11]

-

74

D[13]

MDM data bus [13]

-

75

D[15]

MDM data bus [15]

-

76

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

77

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

78

CEP2CS-0

CEP2 chip select signal

-

79

DREQD2-1

Data request signal

-

80

DACKD2-0

Data acknowledge signal

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

D[0]

ROM data bus [0]

-

2

D[2]

ROM data bus [2]

-

3

D[4]

ROM data bus [4]

-

4

D[6]

ROM data bus [6]

-

5

RD-0

ROM data read signal

-

6

A[0]

ROM address bus [0]

-

7

A[2]

ROM address bus [2]

-

8

A[4]

ROM address bus [4]

-

9

A[6]

ROM address bus [6]

-

10

A[8]

ROM address bus [8]

-

11

A[10]

ROM address bus [10]

-

12

A[12]

ROM address bus [12]

-

13

A[14]

ROM address bus [14]

-

14

A[16]

ROM address bus [16]

-

15

A[18]

ROM address bus [18]

-

16

SG

Signal ground

-

17

SG

Signal ground

-

18

D[1]

ROM data bus [1]

-

19

D[3]

ROM data bus [3]

-

20

D[5]

ROM data bus [5]

-

21

D[7]

ROM data bus [7]

-

22

BOOTCS-0

Chip select signal

-

23

A[1]

ROM address bus [1]

-

24

A[3]

ROM address bus [3]

-

25

A[5]

ROM address bus [5]

-

26

A[7]

ROM address bus [7]

-

27

A[9]

ROM address bus [9]

-

28

A[11]

ROM address bus [11]

-

29

A[13]

ROM address bus [13]

-

30

A[15]

ROM address bus [15]

-

31

A[17]

ROM address bus [17]

-

32

ROMDET0-0

Download board connection detection signal

L

33

5.1VB

+5.1 V

-

34

LEDDL-0

External ROM loading status signal

L

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

RXD

Receiver serial data

-

2

SG

Signal ground

-

3

TXD

Transmitted serial data

-

4

SG

Signal ground

-

5

NC

Not connected

-

6

NC

Not connected

-

7

NC

Not connected

-

8

NC

Not connected

-

9

F-CNT

Finisher connection detection signal

L

10

CNT-GND

Ground

-

Pin No

Symbol

Name

Active

1

BUSY

Busy

-

2

SELECT

Select

-

3

N ACK

nAck

-

4

NFAULT

nFault

-

5

PERROR

PError

-

6

DATA0

Data bus [0]

-

7

DATA1

Data bus [1]

-

8

DATA2

Data bus [2]

-

9

DATA3

Data bus [3]

-

10

DATA4

Data bus [4]

-

11

DATA5

Data bus [5]

-

12

DATA6

Data bus [6]

-

13

DATA7

Data bus [7]

-

14

NINIT

nInit

-

15

STB

nStrobe

-

16

NSEL IN

nSelect In

-

17

NATFD

nAutoFd

-

18

HLH

Host Logic High

-

19

SG

Signal ground

-

20

SG

Signal ground

-

21

SG

Signal ground

-

22

SG

Signal ground

-

23

SG

Signal ground

-

24

SG

Signal ground

-

25

SG

Signal ground

-

26

SG

Signal ground

-

27

SG

Signal ground

-

28

SG

Signal ground

-

29

SG

Signal ground

-

30

SG

Signal ground

-

31

SG

Signal ground

-

32

SG

Signal ground

-

33

SG

Signal ground

-

34

SG

Signal ground

-

35

SG

Signal ground

-

36

PLF

Peripheral Logic High (Pull-up)

H

10.3 Connector Table (e-STUDIO200L/230/230L/280/280S)

05/11

Summary of Contents for e-STUDIO200L

Page 1: ...SERVICE HANDBOOK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 File No SHE040003H0 R04022143001 TTEC Ver08_2006 01 ...

Page 2: ...f Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other coun tries Apple AppleTalk Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc in the U S and other countries PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell Inc Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation Other company names and product names in thi...

Page 3: ...rans porting the equipment Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V 13 2 A 115 V or 127 V 12 A 220 240 V or 240 V 8 A for its power source The equipment must be grounded for safety Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate work...

Page 4: ...uld not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors etc on them even after the power is turned OFF Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places e g rotating operating sections such as gears belts pulleys fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very ...

Page 5: ...ncluding lithium batteries follow the relevant local regulations or rules Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual Attention Se débarrasser de batteries et IC RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel Vorsicht Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC RAMs inclusive der Lithium Batterie nach diesem Handbuch 05 11 ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...6 Adjustment mode 05 e STUDIO202L 232 282 2 63 2 2 7 Setting mode 08 e STUDIO200L 230 280 2 83 2 2 8 Setting mode 08 e STUDIO202L 232 282 2 152 2 2 9 Pixel counter 2 241 2 2 10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode 05 Setting Mode 08 e STUDIO200L 230 280 2 251 2 2 11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode 05 Setting Mode 08 e STUDIO202L 232 282 2 255 3 ADJUSTMENT 3 1 3 1 Adjustment of Auto Toner ...

Page 8: ...10Adjustment of tray volume 3 68 3 11 Adjustment of the RADF MR 3020 3 69 3 11 1 Adjustment of RADF Position 3 69 3 11 2 Adjustment of RADF Height 3 74 3 11 3 Adjustment of Skew 3 76 3 11 4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position 3 79 3 11 5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position 3 80 3 11 6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio 3 82 3 11 7 Adjustment of RADF Opening Closing Sensor 3 83 3 12 Adjustment of the Finis...

Page 9: ...all 5 58 5 1 11 RADF related service call MR 3016 5 59 5 1 12 RADF related service call MR 3020 5 60 5 1 13 Laser optical unit related service call 5 60 5 1 14 Finisher related service call 5 61 5 1 15 Service call for others 5 76 5 1 16 Error in Internet FAX Scanning Function 5 79 5 2 Troubleshooting for the Image 5 94 5 3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD 5 116 5 3 1 Replacing HDD 5 116 5 3 2 Rep...

Page 10: ... 1 4 Order Sheet Format 8 12 8 2 Service Notification 8 14 8 2 1 Outline 8 14 8 2 2 Setting 8 14 8 2 3 Items to be notified 8 19 9 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE e STUDIO202L 232 282 9 1 10 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 10 1 10 1 AC Wire Harness 10 1 10 2 DC Wire Harness e STUDIO200L 230 230L 280 280S Appendix 10 3 Connector Table e STUDIO200L 230 230L 280 280S Appendix 10 4 DC Wire Harne...

Page 11: ... SUPPLIES 2 ERROR CODE AND SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 3 ADJUSTMENT 4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 5 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 FIRMWARE UPDATING 7 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 8 REMOTE SERVICE 9 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE e STUDIO202L 232 282 10 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...inals are manually placed for single side multiple copying Values in are for e STUDIO200L 202L and values in are for e STUDIO280 280S 282 282S in case that the specification is different among e STUDIO200L 202L e STUDIO230 230L 232 232S and e STUDIO280 280S 282 282S Single sided original Double sided original MR 3016 50 127 g m2 13 lb Bond 34 lb Bond 50 105 g m2 13 lb Bond 28 lb Bond MR 3018 35 15...

Page 14: ...2 to 209 g m2 90 lb Index to 115 7 lb Index Only A4 LT size is available for the LCF The tolerance is within 2 Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 20 23 27 20 23 27 15 16 16 20 23 27 20 23 27 A4 R B5 R LT R 19 21 21 19 21 21 15 16 16 19 21 21 B4 LG 18 18 18 18 18 18 15 16 16 18 18 18 A3 LD 15 16 16 15 16 16 15 16 16 15 16 16 Paper size Drawer ...

Page 15: ...steps Copy mode Sec e STUDIO200L 202 e STUDIO230 230L 232 232S e STUDIO280 280S 282 282S Single sided originals Single sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 34 18 95 53 154 28 31 5 84 8 136 2 27 6 72 2 114 0 Single sided originals Double sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 37 44 96 81 155 54 34 5 85 9 137 4 31 6 73 4 116 4 Double sided originals Double sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 70 26 188 48 306 64 ...

Page 16: ...on A3 to A5 R LD to ST R 100 sheets 80 g m2 Stack height 16 mm or less Automatic duplexing unit ADU is available as standard equipment for some destinations or versions Stackless Switchback type Toner supply Automatic toner density detection supply Toner cartridge replacing method There is a recovered toner supply mechanism Density control Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable ...

Page 17: ...O200L 202L 230 232 280 282 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 5 Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below W 637 x D 719 x H 739 mm When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees Fig 1 1 719 739 637 45 04 09 ...

Page 18: ...2 282S 2 discs are included Unpacking setup instruction 1 set Operator s manual 3 pcs except for MJD Operator s manual pocket 1 pc Power cable 1 pc Warranty sheet 1 pc for NAD Setup report 1 set for NAD and MJD Customer satisfaction card 1 pc for MJD Drum installed inside of the equipment 1 pc Toner cartridge 1 pc except for NAD MJD Developer material 1 pc except for NAD MJD Control panel stopper ...

Page 19: ...MR 3016 Drawer Module MY 1021 C Paper Feed Pedestal PFP KD 1011 C Large Capacity Feeder LCF KD 1012 A4 LT A4 C Finisher Hanging type MJ 1022 C Saddle stitch Finisher MJ 1025 C Hole Punch Unit MJ 6005 N E F S 1 Staple Cartridge STAPLE 1600 for MJ 1022 STAPLE 2000 for MJ 1025 Bridge Kit KN 3520 C Job Separator MJ 5004 C Offset Tray MJ 5005 C Key copy Counter Key copy counter socket MU 8 MU 10 Work T...

Page 20: ... STUDIO202L They do not operate with e STUDIO232 232S 282 282S Platen Cover KA 3511PC C Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF MR 3020 Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU MD 0102 Drawer module MY 1021 C Slot cover KE 2330 Paper Feed Pedestal PFP KD 1011 C Large Capacity Feeder LCF KD 1012LT A4 A4 C Finisher Hanging type MJ 1022 C Finisher Console saddle stitcher type MJ 1025 Hole punch unit for MJ 1025...

Page 21: ... 4 1 e STUDIO200L 230 230L 280 280S 1 T Taiwan D Asia C China E Europe NONE North America 1 4 2 e STUDIO202L 232 232S 282 282S 1 T Taiwan D Asia C China E Europe NONE North America Drum OD 1600 Toner cartridge PS ZT2320 T D C E 1 Developer D 2320 C Drum OD 1600 Toner cartridge PS ZT2340 T D C E 1 Developer D 2340 C 05 11 ...

Page 22: ...Scrambler Board GP 1030 Parallel interface kit GF 1140 PCI Slot GO 1040 FAX Board GD 1150 NA AU EU TW C AS 2nd Line for FAX Board GD 1160 NA EU TW C Wireless LAN Adapter GN 1010 Damp Heater MF 2320 U E NIC board GF 1150 Printer Kit GM 1020 GM 1030 Data overwrite kit GP 1050 Desk MH 1700 Drawer Module MY 1021 Slot cover KE 2330 Large Capacity Feeder LCF KD 1012 A4 LT Paper Feed Pedestal PFP KD 1011...

Page 23: ... for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E F S MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Key copy counter MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 Key copy counter socket MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 Work tray...

Page 24: ...PLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 C KN 3520 C KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 C MJ 5004 C MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 C MJ 5005 C MJ 5005 Key copy counter MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 Key copy counter socket MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511...

Page 25: ...025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E F S MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520E KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Key copy counter MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 Key copy counter socket MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 Work tray KK 3511...

Page 26: ... MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 C KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 C MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 C MJ 5005 Key copy counter MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 MU 8 Key copy counter socket MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 MU 10 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater Standard Stan...

Page 27: ...APLE 1600 STAPLE 1600 Saddle stitch finisher MJ 1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Key copy counter MU 8 MU 8 Key copy counter socket MU 10 MU 10 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater MF 2320 Standard Fax board GD 1150NA GD 1150AS 2nd line for Fax bo...

Page 28: ...tor MJ 5004 Offset Tray MJ 5005 Scrambler Board GP 1040 PCI Slot GO 1060 FAX Board GD 11150 NA EU AU AS C TW 2nd Line for FAX Board GD 1160 NA EU N TW C Data overwrite kit GP 1060 Damp Heater MF 2320 U E Printer Kit GM 1070 GM 1080U Desk MH 1700 Drawer Module MY 1021 Slot cover KE 2330 Large Capacity Feeder LCF KD 1012 A4 LT Paper Feed Pedestal PFP KD 1011 Printer Scanner Kit GM 2070 GM 2080U Auto...

Page 29: ...1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E F S Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater MF 2320U Stand...

Page 30: ...1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 C KN 3520 C Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 C MJ 5004 C Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 C MJ 5005 C Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 C KK 3511 C Damp heater Standard Standard Standard Standard Fax board GD 1150AS...

Page 31: ...APLE 1600 Saddle stitch finisher MJ 1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater Standard Standard Fax board GD 1150TW GD 1150AS 2nd line for Fax board GD 1160TW GD 1160EU N Wireless LAN module GN 1041 GN 1041 Bluetooth mo...

Page 32: ...025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E F S Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater MF 2320U Standa...

Page 33: ... 1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 KN 3520 C KN 3520 C Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 MJ 5004 C MJ 5004 C Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 MJ 5005 C MJ 5005 C Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 KK 3511 C KK 3511 C Damp heater Standard Standard Standard Standard Fax board GD 1150A...

Page 34: ...TAPLE 1600 Saddle stitch finisher MJ 1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005E MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater Standard Standard Fax board GD 1150TW GD 1150AS 2nd line for Fax board GD 1160TW GD 1160EU N Wireless LAN module GN 1041 GN 1041 Bluetooth m...

Page 35: ... 1022 STAPLE 1600 STAPLE 1600 Saddle stitch finisher MJ 1025 MJ 1025 Staple cartridge for MJ 1025 STAPLE 2000 STAPLE 2000 Hole punch unit MJ 6005N MJ 6005E Bridge kit KN 3520 KN 3520 Job separator MJ 5004 MJ 5004 Offset tray MJ 5005 MJ 5005 Work tray KK 3511 KK 3511 Damp heater MF 2320U Standard Fax board GD 1150NA GD 1150AS 2nd line for Fax board GD 1160NA GD 1160EU N Wireless LAN module GN 1041 ...

Page 36: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 1 24 ...

Page 37: ...eding ADU misfeeding Paper not reaching the 1st trans port sensor The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the 1st transport sensor during duplex printing P 5 15 E120 Bypass misfeeding Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the 1st transport sensor P 5 16 E130 Upper drawer misfeeding Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor The...

Page 38: ...st transport sensor The paper does not reach the 1st transport sensor after it has passed the 2nd transport sensor P 5 4 E320 PFP upper drawer transport jam Paper not reach ing the 2nd transport sensor The paper does not reach the 2nd transport sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor P 5 6 E330 PFP lower drawer transport jam Paper not reach ing the registration sensor The paper...

Page 39: ...5 25 E450 LCF side cover open jam The LCF side cover has opened during printing P 5 26 E480 Bridge unit open jam The bridge unit has opened during printing P 5 26 E490 Job separator cover open jam The job separator cover has opened during printing P 5 27 E491 Offset tray cover open jam The offset tray cover has opened during printing P 5 27 E510 Paper transport jam ADU section Stop jam in the ADU ...

Page 40: ...rom the scanning section to reverse section P 5 30 E724 Stop jam at the registration sensor The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sen sor P 5 30 E725 Stop jam at the read sensor The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its lead ing edge has reached this sensor P 5 31 E726 Transport exit signal re...

Page 41: ... jam at the offset tray transport sensor The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset tray transport sensor P 5 11 E9F0 Finisher jam Puncher unit Punching jam Punching is not performed properly MJ 1025 When MJ 6005 is installed P 5 36 EA10 Finisher jam Finisher unit Paper transport delay jam The paper which has passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sen sor MJ 1022 1025 P 5 37 ...

Page 42: ...the intermedi ary process tray MJ 1022 P 5 44 EB30 Finisher jam Ready time time out jam The equipment judges that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing P 5 46 EB50 Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming...

Page 43: ...e position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified period of time P 5 55 C280 Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time The carriage does not reach to its home position in a specified period of time P 5 55 C410 Fuser unit related service call Thermistor or heater abnormality at p...

Page 44: ...r is turned on MJ 1025 when MJ 6005 is installed P 5 67 CC30 Stack processing motor abnormality The stack process ing motor is not rotating normally or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally MJ 1022 Paddle motor abnormality The paddle motor is not rotat ing normally or the swing guide is not moving normally MJ 1025 P 5 67 CC50 Horizontal registration motor abnormality The horizontal regist...

Page 45: ...5 76 F070 Communication related service call Communication error between System CPU and Engine CPU P 5 58 F090 Other service call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board P 5 76 F091 NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board P 5 77 F092 SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board P 5 77 F100 HDD format error HDD cannot be initialized normally P 5 77 F101 HDD unmounted Connection of HDD cannot be detected P 5 77...

Page 46: ...ure P 5 80 1C32 File deletion failure P 5 79 1C33 File access failure P 5 80 1C40 Image conversion abnormality P 5 80 1C60 HDD full failure during processing P 5 80 1C61 Address Book reading failure P 5 80 1C62 Memory acquiring failure P 5 80 1C63 Terminal IP address unset P 5 80 1C64 Terminal mail address unset P 5 80 1C65 SMTP address unset P 5 80 1C66 Server time time out error P 5 80 1C67 NIC ...

Page 47: ...500 Terminal mail address error RFC 500 P 5 82 2501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments HOST NAME error RFC 501 Destination mail address error RFC 501 Terminal mail address error RFC 501 P 5 82 2503 Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error RFC 503 P 5 82 2504 Command parameter not imple mented HOST NAME error RFC 504 P 5 82 2550 Mailbox unavailable Destination mail address error...

Page 48: ...age List library error P 5 83 2B71 Document s expire s in a few days Documents expiring in a few days exist 2B80 Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing nearly full Hard disk space in SHR partition is nearly full 90 2B90 Insufficient Memory Insufficient memory capacity P 5 83 2BA0 Invalid Box password specified Invalid Box password P 5 84 2BB0 Job canceled Job canceling 2BB1 Power failure occurred P...

Page 49: ...ailed to process your Job Insuf ficient disk space HDD full failure during processing P 5 86 2C61 Failed to read AddressBook Address Book reading failure P 5 86 2C62 Not enough memory Memory acquiring failure P 5 85 2C63 Invalid Domain Address Terminal IP address unset P 5 86 2C64 Invalid Domain Address Terminal mail address unset P 5 86 2C65 Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP address unset P 5...

Page 50: ...parameter specified Invalid parameter P 5 88 2D62 Failed to connect to network des tination Check destination path File server connection error P 5 89 2D63 Specified network path is invalid Check destination path Invalid network path P 5 89 2D64 Logon to file server failed Check username and password Login failure P 5 89 2D65 There are too many documents in the folder Failed in creating new docume...

Page 51: ... CODE AND SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 15 2 2DA7 Failed to acquire resource Resource acquiring failure P 5 88 2DC0 Job canceled Job canceling 2DC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P 5 89 Error code Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Contents Troubleshooting ...

Page 52: ...yze Error has been detected in the received mail This mail could not be transferred to the administrator P 5 90 3A30 Whole partial mails were not reached by timeout Partial mail time out error P 5 90 3A40 Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail Partial mail related error P 5 90 3A50 HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail Insufficient HDD capacity error P 5 90 3A51 HDD Full...

Page 53: ...or has been detected in the received mail Content Type error P 5 90 3B21 Content Type Error has been detected in the received mail This mail has been transferred to the administrator P 5 90 3B22 Content Type Error has been detected in the received mail This mail could not be transferred to the administrator P 5 90 3B30 Charset Error has been detected in the received mail Charset error P 5 90 3B31 ...

Page 54: ...ted in the received mail TIFF resolution error P 5 91 3C31 Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail This mail has been transferred to the administrator P 5 91 3C32 Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail This mail could not be transferred to the administrator P 5 91 3C40 Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail TIFF paper size error P 5 ...

Page 55: ... 3D20 Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail Offramp destination limitation error P 5 91 3D30 Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail FAX board error P 5 91 3E10 POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail POP3 server connection error P 5 92 3E20 POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail POP3 server con...

Page 56: ...rint Scheduled print etc cannot be performed P 5 92 4034 e Filing storing limitation error Printing with its data being stored to the HDD print and e Filing print to e Filing etc cannot be performed P 5 92 4035 Local file storing limitation error Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent when Local is selected for the destination of the file to save P 5 92 4036 User authentication error The user ...

Page 57: ... Envelope S CHO 3 Envelope T YOU 4 Envelope Z Not selected C Sort mode staple mode 0 Non sort Non staple 1 Group 2 Sort 7 Front staple 8 Double staple 9 Rear staple A Saddle stitch D ADF mode 0 Unused 1 AUTO FEED SADF 2 STACK FEED E APS AMS mode 0 Not selected 1 APS 2 AMS F Duplex mode 0 Not selected 1 Book 2 Double sided Single sided 4 Double sided Duplex copying 8 Single sided Duplex copying G U...

Page 58: ... 2 2 5 Adjustment mode 05 e STUDIO200L 230 280 P 2 63 2 2 6 Adjustment mode 05 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Setting mode 08 Refer to P 2 83 2 2 7 Setting mode 08 e STUDIO200L 230 280 P 2 152 2 2 8 Setting mode 08 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Mode For start Contents For exit Display Control panel check mode 0 1 POWER All LEDs on the control panel are lit and all the LCD pixels blink POWER OFF ON Test mode 0 3 POWE...

Page 59: ...unter toner cartridge reference 105 Stored information of pixel counter service technician reference 106 Error history Digital keys Key in the first code to be printed Digital keys Key in the last code to be printed POWER OFF ON Exit START List starts to be printed START START 6 START POWER Code 1 Auto toner adjustment 2 PM Support Screen START Operation started POWER OFF ON Exit Warming up Contro...

Page 60: ...med before the equipment enters the test mode Fig 2 2 Example of display during input check Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons A to H are highlighted are listed in the following pages The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the FAX button and the digital keys in the test mode 03 0 3 POWER START FAX Digital keys CLEAR LCD ON POWER OFF ON Exit ...

Page 61: ...PFP side cover opening closing switch Cover opened Cover closed G PFP upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H PFP upper drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other than upper limit position 3 A LCF tray bottom sensor Tray at bottom position Other than bottom posi tion B LCF standby side paper mis stacking sensor Correct stack ing Incorrect stacking C D E LCF drawer detectio...

Page 62: ...or Paper present No paper 6 A B C D E 1st transport sensor Paper present No paper F G Upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H Upper drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other than upper limit position 7 A B C D E 2nd transport sensor Paper present No paper F G Lower drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H Lower drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other ...

Page 63: ...0 A B C D Lower drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present E Lower drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present F G H Bypass paper width sensor Paper width size 2 1 0 1 1 1 A3 A4 1 1 0 B5 R 1 0 1 A5 R 1 0 0 A3 A4 0 1 1 Card size 0 1 0 A4 R A5 0 0 1 B6 R 0 0 0 B4 R B5 Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted display e g Normal dis play e g 05 11 ...

Page 64: ...is installed Paper full Paper not full Offset Tray separate sensor When Offset Tray is installed Separator at home position Other than home position D Fuser unit connection Fuser unit installed Fuser unit not installed E Bridge unit transport sensor 2 When bridge unit is installed No paper Paper present F Bridge unit cover opening closing detection switch When Bridge unit is installed Cover opened...

Page 65: ... RADF tray sensor Original present No original B RADF empty sensor Original present No original C RADF jam access cover switch Cover opened Cover closed D RADF opening closing sensor RADF opened RADF closed E RADF exit sensor Original present No original F RADF reverse sensor Original present No original G RADF read sensor Original present No original H RADF registration sensor Original present No...

Page 66: ... or 1030 Connectable Not connect able C Dongle for Scanner upgrade kit GM 3020 or 3030 Connectable Not connect able D Dongles for other equipments Other USB devices Connectable Not connect able E F G H Bridge unit Job Separator Offset Tray None Bridge unit Job Separator Offset Tray connection detection 3 Normal display Highlighting display Highlighting display Highlighting display Bridge unit Job ...

Page 67: ...rmed before the equipment enters the test mode Fig 2 3 Example of display during input check Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons A to H are highlighted are listed in the following pages The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the FAX button and the digital keys in the test mode 03 0 3 POWER START FAX Digital keys CLEAR LCD ON POWER OFF ON Exit...

Page 68: ...FP side cover opening closing switch Cover opened Cover closed G PFP upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H PFP upper drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other than upper limit position 3 A LCF tray bottom sensor Tray at bottom position Other than bottom posi tion B LCF standby side paper mis stacking sensor Correct stack ing Incorrect stacking C D E LCF drawer detection...

Page 69: ...sor Paper present No paper 6 A B C D E 1st transport sensor Paper present No paper F G Upper drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H Upper drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other than upper limit position 7 A B C D E 2nd transport sensor Paper present No paper F G Lower drawer empty sensor No paper Paper present H Lower drawer tray up sensor Tray at upper limit position Other...

Page 70: ... A B C D Lower drawer detection switch Drawer not installed Drawer present E Lower drawer paper stock sensor Paper almost empty Paper present F G H Bypass paper width sensor Paper width size 2 1 0 1 1 1 A3 A4 1 1 0 B5 R 1 0 1 A5 R 1 0 0 A3 A4 0 1 1 Card size 0 1 0 A4 R A5 0 0 1 B6 R 0 0 0 B4 R B5 Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted display e g Normal dis play e g 05 11 ...

Page 71: ... is installed Paper full Paper not full Offset Tray separate sensor When Offset Tray is installed Separator at home position Other than home position D Fuser unit connection Fuser unit installed Fuser unit not installed E Bridge unit transport sensor 2 When bridge unit is installed No paper Paper present F Bridge unit cover opening closing detection switch When Bridge unit is installed Cover opene...

Page 72: ...RADF tray sensor Original present No original B RADF empty sensor Original present No original C RADF jam access cover switch Cover opened Cover closed D RADF opening closing sensor RADF opened RADF closed E RADF exit sensor Original present No original F RADF reverse sensor Original present No original G RADF read sensor Original present No original H RADF registration sensor Original present No ...

Page 73: ...0 or 1030 Connectable Not connect able C Dongle for Scanner upgrade kit GM 3020 or 3030 Connectable Not connect able D Dongles for other equipments Other USB devices Connectable Not connect able E F G H Bridge unit Job Separator Offset Tray None Bridge unit Job Separator Offset Tray connection detection 3 Normal display Highlighting display Highlighting display Highlighting display Bridge unit Job...

Page 74: ...ise this code cannot be used It may take some time 2 sec to 10 sec before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted display e g Normal dis play e g 0 A Dongle for Printer Scanner kit GM 2070 or 2080U Con nected Connectable Not connect able B Dongle for Printer kit GM 1070 or 1080U Connected Connectable Not connect able C Dong...

Page 75: ...e 4 Status of the output signals can be checked by keying in the following codes in the test mode 03 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit START Code Operation ON Stop code Operation OFF START 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit START CLEAR Operation One direction Test mode standby Code 0 3 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Code START START Operation ON Test mode standby CLEAR Operation OFF 0 3 POWER POWER OFF START Code ...

Page 76: ...pass feed clutch ON OFF 3 205 Middle transport clutch ON OFF 3 206 LCF pickup solenoid ON OFF 3 207 LCF end fence reciprocating movement 2 208 LCF end fence motor ON OFF 3 209 LCF feed clutch ON OFF 3 210 LCF transport clutch ON OFF 3 217 Lower transport clutch ON OFF 3 218 Key copy counter count up 2 222 ADU clutch ON OFF 3 225 PFP transport clutch ON OFF 3 226 PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON OFF...

Page 77: ...tation 3 282 RADF feed motor ON OFF reverse rotation 3 283 RADF read motor ON OFF normal rotation 3 284 RADF reverse motor ON OFF normal rotation 3 285 RADF reverse motor ON OFF reverse rotation 3 289 Internal cooling fan 1 ON OFF high speed 3 290 Internal cooling fan 1 ON OFF low speed 3 294 RADF reverse solenoid ON OFF 3 295 Power OFF mode for 200 V series 4 297 RADF fan motor ON OFF 3 410 Inter...

Page 78: ... the error 2 During test printing the CLEAR button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode 04 Code Types of test pattern Remarks 111 Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Error diffusion 113 Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Error diffusion 142 Grid pattern Pattern wid...

Page 79: ... FUNCTION CLEAR Key in a value CLEAR Corrects value ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM FAX Test copy Press FUNCTION CLEAR to enter minus 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Code START ENTER or INTERRUPT Value unchangeable FAX Test copy Value displayed 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL UP or DOWN Adjust a value CLEAR Corrects value ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM FAX Test...

Page 80: ...test copy at the adjustment mode In that case turn ON the power normally leave the equipment for approx 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START Automatic adjustment FAX Test copy CANCEL or CLEAR 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START Automatic adjustment FAX Test copy CANCEL or CLEAR CANCEL...

Page 81: ... pattern in Adjustment Mode 05 Operation One test print is printed out when the FAX button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen Code Types of test pattern Remarks 1 Grid pattern Refer to 3 2 3 Printer related adjustment 3 Grid pattern Duplex printing Refer to 3 2 3 Printer related adjustment ...

Page 82: ...adjustment ALL 135 0 255 M As the value increases the transformer output increases correspond ingly Remove the devel oper unit and install the adjustment jig to make adjustment Chap 3 6 3 210 Charger Main charger grid bias out put adjustment ALL 90 0 255 M 3 220 Transfer Transfer transformer DC output adjustment H ALL 165 0 255 M 3 221 Transfer Transfer transformer DC output adjustment C ALL 179 0...

Page 83: ...nitialization ALL SYS Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced 6 357 RADF Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed ALL 50 0 100 SYS When the value increases by 1 the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx 0 1 1 358 RADF RADF sideways deviation adjustment ALL 128 0 255 SYS When the value increase...

Page 84: ... duction ratio PRT 136 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the reproduction ratio of pri mary scanning direction increases by approx 0 07 approx 0 1 mm step 1 405 PPC 134 0 255 M 1 410 Laser Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position PPC 128 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the writ ing start position shifts to the front side by approx 0 0423 mm 1 411 PRT 153 0 255 M 1 421 ...

Page 85: ...side at duplexing PPC PRT 29 0 255 M 4 435 Image Top margin adjustment blank area at the leading edge of the paper PRT 24 0 255 M 1 436 Image Left margin adjustment blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction PRT 0 0 255 M 1 437 Image Right margin adjustment blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction PRT 0 0 255 M 1 438 Image Bottom margin adju...

Page 86: ...size ALL 8 0 63 M 4 450 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Upper drawer Plain paper Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 450 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 450 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 452 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Lower drawer Plain paper Long size ALL 12 0 63 M 4 452 1 Middle size ALL 10 0 63 M 4 452 2 Short siz...

Page 87: ...Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Bypass feed ing Thick paper 2 Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 461 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 461 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Bypass feed ing Thick paper 3 Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 3 Postca...

Page 88: ... feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Upper drawer Thick paper 1 Long size ALL 20 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 8 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 219 mm or shorter 4 469 1 Thick paper 1 Middle size ALL 20 0 63 M 4 469 2 Thick paper 1 Short size ALL 20 0 63 M 4 469 3 T...

Page 89: ...es by 1 the image shifts toward the front side by 0 0423 mm 4 497 1 Lower drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 2 PFPupper drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 3 PFP lower drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 4 LCF ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 5 Bypass feeding ALL 128 0 255 M 4 498 0 Laser Adjustment of primary scan ning laser writing start position at duplex feed ing Long size ALL 148 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the i...

Page 90: ... ground becomes more brightened 1 533 Photo PPC 16 0 255 SYS 1 534 Text PPC 64 0 255 SYS 1 570 Image Range correc tion on origi nal manually set on the original glass Text Photo PPC EUR 12 UC 12 JPN 22 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is an adjustment for auto matic density and ten s place is for manual den sity O...

Page 91: ...s One s place Fixed value 05 620 is 1 05 621 is 2 05 622 is 5 Ten s place Adjustable from 0 to 9 regarding the default value as the stan dard The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes When entering 0 on the ten s place this value is not displayed on the entry screen 1 621 Photo PPC 2 0 99 SYS 1 622 Text PPC EUR 45 UC 45 JPN 45 0 99 SYS 1 653 Image Adjustment of smudged faint text Text ...

Page 92: ... M 4 676 3 PRT 4 0 10 M 4 676 4 PRT 5 0 10 M 4 693 Image Range correc tion on origi nal set on the RADF Text Photo PPC EUR 12 UC 12 JPN 22 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is an adjustment for auto matic density and ten s place is for manual den sity Once they are fixed the range correc tion is performed with stan...

Page 93: ...stment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Light step value Photo FAX 20 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image of the light steps becomes lighter 1 719 Text Photo FAX 20 0 255 SYS 1 720 Image Density adjustment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Dark step value Photo FAX 20 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image of the dark steps becomes darker 1 724 Text Photo FAX 20 0 255 SYS 1 725...

Page 94: ...he background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is an adjustment for auto matic density and ten s place is for manual den sity Once they are fixed the range correc tion is performed with standard values The values of the back ground peak and text peak affect the reproduc tion of the background density and text density respectively 1 fixed fixed 2 varied fixed 3 fixed varied 4 varied ...

Page 95: ...ge Sharpness adjustment Text Photo Reproduc tion ratio 40 or smaller SCN 1 0 99 SYS When the value increases the image becomes sharper When the value decreases the image becomes softer The smaller the value is the less the moire becomes One s place Fixed value 05 865 is 1 05 866 is 2 05 867 is 5 Ten s place Sharpness intensity 0 Use default value 1 9 Filter inten sity 4 865 1 Reproduc tion ratio 4...

Page 96: ...rrec tion on origi nal set on the RADF Custom Mode 1 PPC EUR 12 UC 12 JPN 22 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is an adjustment for auto matic density and ten s place is for manual den sity Once they are fixed the range correc tion is performed with standard values The values of the background peak and text peak aff...

Page 97: ...ustment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Center value Custom Mode 1 PPC 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image of the center step becomes darker 1 932 Custom Mode 2 PPC 128 0 255 SYS 1 933 Custom Mode 3 PPC 128 0 255 SYS 1 934 Image Density adjustment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Light step value Custom Mode 1 PPC 20 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image of the light ste...

Page 98: ...nt to the set value 5 1 to 9 Select the slope of low density The smaller the value is the darker the background becomes 00 Use default value 1 944 Custom Mode 2 PPC 0 0 99 SYS 1 945 Custom Mode 3 PPC 0 0 99 SYS 1 976 Mainte nance Equipment number serial number entry ALL SYS When this adjustment is performed with this code the setting code 08 995 is also performed auto matically 10 digits 1 Adjustm...

Page 99: ... FUNCTION CLEAR Key in a value CLEAR Corrects value ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM FAX Test copy Press FUNCTION CLEAR to enter minus 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Code START ENTER or INTERRUPT Value unchangeable FAX Test copy Value displayed 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL UP or DOWN Adjust a value CLEAR Corrects value ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM FAX Test...

Page 100: ...t copy at the adjustment mode In that case turn ON the power normally leave the equipment for approx 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START Automatic adjustment FAX Test copy CANCEL or CLEAR 0 5 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START Automatic adjustment FAX Test copy CANCEL or CLEAR CANCEL EN...

Page 101: ...ttern in Adjustment Mode 05 Operation One test print is printed out when the FAX button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen Code Types of test pattern Remarks 1 Grid pattern Refer to 3 2 3 Printer related adjustment 3 Grid pattern Duplex printing Refer to 3 2 3 Printer related adjustment 05 12 ...

Page 102: ...adjustment ALL 135 0 255 M As the value increases the transformer output increases correspond ingly Remove the devel oper unit and install the adjustment jig to make adjustment Chap 3 6 3 210 Charger Main charger grid bias out put adjustment ALL 90 0 255 M 3 220 Transfer Transfer transformer DC output adjustment H ALL 165 0 255 M 3 221 Transfer Transfer transformer DC output adjustment C ALL 179 0...

Page 103: ...ng amount increases by approx 0 5 mm 1 355 for double sided orig inal ALL 10 0 20 SYS 1 357 RADF Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed ALL 50 0 100 SYS When the value increases by 1 the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx 0 1 1 358 RADF RADF sideways deviation adjustment ALL 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases by 1 the image of origin...

Page 104: ...he value increases by 1 the writ ing start position shifts to the front side by approx 0 0423 mm 1 411 PRT 153 0 255 M 1 421 Drive Adjustment of secondary scanning direction repro duction ratio fine adjustment of main motor speed PPC PRT 129 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the reproduction ratio of sec ondary scanning direc tion increases by approx 0 04 1 422 FAX 139 0 255 M 1 424 Drive Fine...

Page 105: ...direction Reverse side at duplexing PPC PRT 29 0 255 M 4 435 Image Top margin adjustment blank area at the leading edge of the paper PRT 24 0 255 M 1 436 Image Left margin adjustment blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction PRT 0 0 255 M 1 437 Image Right margin adjustment blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction PRT 0 0 255 M 1 438 Image ...

Page 106: ...e ALL 8 0 63 M 4 450 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Upper drawer Plain paper Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 450 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 450 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 452 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Lower drawer Plain paper Long size ALL 12 0 63 M 4 452 1 Middle size ALL 10 0 63 M 4 452 2 Short size A...

Page 107: ...eraligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Bypass feed ing Thick paper 2 Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 461 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 461 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 0 Paper feeding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Bypass feed ing Thick paper 3 Long size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 1 Middle size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 2 Short size ALL 17 0 63 M 4 462 3 Postcard ...

Page 108: ...eding Paperaligning amount adjustment at the registra tion section Upper drawer Thick paper 1 Long size ALL 20 0 63 M When the value increases by 1 the aligning amount increases by approx 0 8 mm Paper length Long size 330 mm or longer Middle size 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 219 mm or shorter 4 469 1 Thick paper 1 Middle size ALL 20 0 63 M 4 469 2 Thick paper 1 Short size ALL 20 0 63 M 4 469 3 Thic...

Page 109: ...by 1 the image shifts toward the front side by 0 0423 mm 4 497 1 Lower drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 2 PFPupper drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 3 PFP lower drawer ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 4 LCF ALL 128 0 255 M 4 497 5 Bypass feeding ALL 128 0 255 M 4 498 0 Laser Adjustment of primary scan ning laser writing start position at duplex feed ing Long size ALL 148 0 255 M When the value increases by 1 the imag...

Page 110: ...ound becomes more brightened 1 533 Photo PPC 16 0 255 SYS 1 534 Text PPC 64 0 255 SYS 1 570 Image Range correc tion on origi nal manually set on the original glass Text Photo PPC EUR 12 UC 12 JPN 22 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is an adjustment for auto matic density and ten s place is for manual den sity Once...

Page 111: ...255 SYS 4 596 2 Image High density PRT 128 0 255 SYS 4 597 0 Image Gamma bal ance adjust ment PS Text Low density PRT 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the density in the target area becomes higher 4 597 1 Image Medium density PRT 128 0 255 SYS 4 597 2 Image High density PRT 128 0 255 SYS 4 598 0 Image Gamma bal ance adjust ment PCL Photo Low density PRT 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases...

Page 112: ...UC 45 JPN 45 0 99 SYS 1 648 Image Adjustment of smudged faint text Text Photo PPC 2 0 4 SYS Adjusts the level of the smudged faint text With increasing the value the faint text is suppressed and with decreasing it the smudged text is sup pressed 1 654 Image Adjustment of smudged faint text PS PRT 5 0 9 M Adjustment of the smudged faint text With decreasing the value the faint text is suppressed an...

Page 113: ...en s place is for manual den sity Once they are fixed the range correc tion is performed with standard values The values of the back ground peak and text peak affect the reproduc tion of the background density and text density respectively 1 fixed fixed 2 varied fixed 3 fixed varied 4 varied varied Background peak Text peak 1 694 Photo PPC 12 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS 1 695 Text PPC 22 11 14 21 ...

Page 114: ...e becomes darker 1 729 Text Photo FAX 128 0 255 SYS 1 820 Image Range correc tion Text peak adjustment Text Photo SCN 224 0 255 SYS When the value decreases the text becomes darker 1 821 Text SCN 224 0 255 SYS 1 822 Photo SCN 239 0 255 SYS 1 825 Image Range correc tion on origi nal manually set on the original glass Text Photo SCN 12 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Sets whether the values of the backg...

Page 115: ...836 Text SCN 48 0 255 SYS 1 837 Photo SCN 40 0 255 SYS 1 845 Image Density adjustment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Center value Text Photo SCN 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image at the center step becomes darker 1 846 Text SCN 128 0 255 SYS 1 847 Photo SCN 128 0 255 SYS 1 850 Image Density adjustment Fine adjust ment of man ual density Light step value Text Photo SCN 20 0 255 ...

Page 116: ...nt Photo Reproduc tion ratio 40 or smaller SCN 5 0 99 SYS 4 867 1 Reproduc tion ratio 41 80 SCN 5 0 99 SYS 4 867 2 Reproduc tion ratio 81 or larger SCN 5 0 99 SYS 4 913 Image Range correc tion on origi nal manually set on the original glass Custom Mode 1 PPC EUR 12 UC 12 JPN 22 11 14 21 24 31 34 41 44 SYS Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not One s place is a...

Page 117: ...SYS When the value increases the back ground becomes more brightened 1 920 Custom Mode 2 PPC 64 0 255 SYS 1 921 Custom Mode 3 PPC 16 0 255 SYS 1 922 Image Sharpness adjustment Custom Mode 1 PPC 1 0 99 SYS When the value increases the image becomes sharper When the value decreases the image becomes softer The smaller the value is the less the moire becomes One s place Fixed value 05 922 is 1 05 923...

Page 118: ... 20 0 255 SYS 1 939 Custom Mode 3 PPC 20 0 255 SYS 1 940 Image Density adjustment Fine adjust ment of auto matic density Custom Mode 1 PPC 128 0 255 SYS When the value increases the image becomes darker 1 941 Custom Mode 2 PPC 128 0 255 SYS 1 942 Custom Mode 3 PPC 128 0 255 SYS 1 943 Image Gamma data slope adjust ment Custom Mode 1 PPC 0 0 99 SYS One s place 0 Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9 ...

Page 119: ...ER or INTERRUPT Sets or changes value CLEAR Corrects value CANCEL 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START ENTER or INTERRUPT Adjustment value cannot be changed 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL or CLEAR Automatic setting ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR Sets or chan...

Page 120: ... RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Select icon START CANCEL ENTER or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key 1st setting Digital key 2nd setting START START CANCEL ENTER or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key or Software key...

Page 121: ...urday from 1 to 6 5 201 General Destination selection ALL EUR 0 UC 1 JPN 2 0 2 M 0 EUR 1 UC 2 JPN 1 202 User interface Counter installed externally ALL 0 0 3 M 0 No external counter 1 Coin controller 2 Copy key card 3 Key copy counter 1 203 General Line adjustment mode ALL 0 0 1 M 0 For factory shipment 1 For line Field 0 must be selected 1 204 User interface Auto clear timer setting ALL 3 0 10 SY...

Page 122: ...S 0 Black letter on white background 1 White letter on black background 1 209 User interface Default setting of filing for mat when E mailing ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 TIFF Multi 1 PDF 1 210 Paper feeding Paper size A6 R feeding widthwise direction PRT 148 105 148 432 105 297 M 10 219 User interface Default setting of filing for mat when storing files SCN 0 0 3 SYS 0 TIFF Multi 1 PDF 2 Not used 3 TIFF Singl...

Page 123: ...40 297 M 10 230 Paper feeding Paper size A4 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 297 210 182 432 140 297 M 10 231 Paper feeding Paper size A5 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 210 148 182 432 140 297 M 10 232 Paper feeding Paper size B4 feeding widthwise direction ALL 364 257 182 432 140 297 M 10 233 Paper feeding Paper size B5 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 257 182 182 432 140 297 M 10 234 Paper ...

Page 124: ...e feeding widthwise direction ALL 148 100 148 432 100 297 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed non standard type into MEMORY 2 10 248 Paper feeding Memory 3 Paper size bypass feed ing non standard type feeding widthwise direction ALL 148 100 148 432 100 297 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed non standard type into MEMORY 3 10 249 Paper feeding Memory 4 Paper size bypass feed ing no...

Page 125: ...unter copy ALL 1 2 1 Electrical counter Backup counter 2 Backup counter Electrical counter P 2 150 Fig 2 4 258 Mainte nance FSMS acceptance ALL 1 0 2 SYS Sets whether the FSMS connection is accepted or not 0 Prohibited 1 Accepted USB nor mal connection 2 Accepted USB forcible connection 1 259 Network Storage period trial and pri vate PRT 14 0 30 SYS 0 No limits 1 to 30 1 to 30 days 1 260 Network W...

Page 126: ...ting a user box 0 Not deleted 1 to 999 Retention period Unit Day 1 271 General Warning display of the HDD capacity to be filled ALL 90 0 100 SYS Sets the percentage of the HDD capacity filled which warning is dis played 0 to 100 0 to 100 1 272 Scanning Notification setting of E mail saving time limit ALL 3 0 99 SYS Sets the days left the notification of E mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99 0 t...

Page 127: ...ing of rotation angle of original SCN 0 0 3 SYS 0 0 degree 1 90 degrees 2 180 degrees 3 270 degrees 1 286 User interface Default setting of original paper size SCN 0 0 22 SYS 0 Automatic 1 A3 2 A4 3 LD 4 LT 5 A4 R 6 A5 R 7 LT R 8 LG 9 B4 10 B5 11 ST R 12 COMP 13 B5 R 14 FOLIO 15 13 LG 16 8 5 x 8 5 18 A6 R 19 Size mixed 20 8K 21 16K 22 16K R 1 288 General Searching interval of delet ing expired fli...

Page 128: ...Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128 A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value 1 297 Network Raw printing job PCL font pitch PRT 1000 44 9999 SYS Sets the font pitch from 0 44 to 99 99 A hun dredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value 1 298 Network Raw printing job PCL font size PRT 1200 400 99975 SYS Sets the font size from 4 to 999 75 A hun d...

Page 129: ... 305 10 ST 305 11 COMP 305 12 13 LG 305 13 8 5 x 8 5 305 14 16K 305 15 8K 305 16 Others 306 0 Counter Number of output pages in printer func tion A3 PRT 0 8 digits SYS Counts the output pages in the printer function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 306 1 A4 306 2 A5 306 3 A6 306 4...

Page 130: ...LT 307 10 ST 307 11 COMP 307 12 13 LG 307 13 8 5 x 8 5 307 14 16K 307 15 8K 307 16 Others 308 0 Counter Number of output pages in FAX func tion A3 FAX 0 8 digits SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX func tion for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 308 1 A4 308 2 A5 308 3 A6 308 4 B4 3...

Page 131: ...312 10 ST 312 11 COMP 312 12 13 LG 312 13 8 5 x 8 5 312 14 16K 312 15 8K 312 16 Others 313 0 Counter Number of scanning pages in scanning function A3 SCN 0 8 digits SYS Counts the scanning pages in the scanning function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 313 1 A4 313 2 A5 313 3 A6 3...

Page 132: ...4 10 ST 314 11 COMP 314 12 13 LG 314 13 8 5 x 8 5 314 14 16K 314 15 8K 314 16 Others 315 0 Counter Number of transmitted pages in FAX function A3 FAX 0 8 digits SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX func tion for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 315 1 A4 315 2 A5 315 3 A6 315 4 ...

Page 133: ...tion according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 320 1 Counter Small PPC 0 8 digits SYS 14 320 2 Counter Total PPC 0 8 digits SYS 14 321 0 Counter Display of number of output pages in printer func tion Large PRT 0 8 digits...

Page 134: ...Function according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 323 1 Counter Small PRT 0 8 digits SYS 14 323 2 Counter Total PRT 0 8 digits SYS 14 327 0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in copier func tion Large PPC 0 8 d...

Page 135: ...unction according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 329 1 Counter Small SCN 0 8 digits SYS 14 329 2 Counter Total SCN 0 8 digits SYS 14 330 0 Counter Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX function Large FAX 0 8 dig...

Page 136: ...ges Large ALL 0 8 digits SYS Displays the total num ber of pages in the copier printer scanning FAX functions 14 335 1 Counter Small ALL 0 8 digits SYS 14 335 2 Counter Total ALL 0 8 digits SYS 14 337 Paper feeding Paper size 10 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 241 105 148 432 105 297 M 10 338 Paper feeding Paper size DL R feeding widthwise direction ALL 220 110 148 432 105 297 M 10 339 Paper fee...

Page 137: ...359 Counter Counter for LCF feeding ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF 2 360 Counter Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer 2 370 Counter Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer 2 372 Counter Counter for ADU ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the numb...

Page 138: ...C450 9 C440 10 C470 11 C470 12 C480 13 C490 14 C470 15 C480 16 C490 17 C470 18 C480 19 C490 1 404 0 Fuser Temperature drop setting in ready status Center ther mistor The first drop ALL 1 0 10 M This code is valid only when 20 is set to 08 886 Setting value x 5 C from 0 C to 50 C 4 404 1 The sec ond drop ALL 1 0 10 M 4 404 2 The third drop ALL 1 0 10 M 4 404 3 The fourth drop ALL 1 0 10 M 4 405 0 F...

Page 139: ...r temperature on standby Center thermistor ALL 8 0 12 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 1 412 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Center thermistor Thick paper 3 ALL 9 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 413 Fuser Fu...

Page 140: ...e first drop ALL 15 2 60 M This code is valid only when 20 is set to 08 886 Setting value x 1 min from 2 to 60 min later 4 424 1 The sec ond drop ALL 15 2 60 M 4 424 2 The third drop ALL 15 2 60 M 4 424 3 The fourth drop ALL 15 2 60 M 4 425 0 Fuser Temperature dropswitching time setting in ready status Side ther mistor The first drop ALL 15 2 60 M 4 425 1 The sec ond drop ALL 15 2 60 M 4 425 2 The...

Page 141: ...ing time for first printing Thick paper 2 ALL 10 0 15 M 0 Invalid 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 11 12 sec 12 14 sec 13 16 sec 14 18 sec 15 20 sec 1 440 Fuser Pre running time for first printing Plain paper ALL 0 0 15 M 0 Invalid 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 11 12 sec 12 14 sec 13 16 sec 14 18 s...

Page 142: ... 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 452 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Side thermistor Thick paper 2 ALL 8 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 453 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Side thermistor OHP film ALL 8 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 15...

Page 143: ...he number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer 4 464 1 Others ALL 5 0 5 M 4 465 0 Paper feeding Feeding retry number set ting PFP upper drawer Plain paper ALL 5 0 5 M Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer 4 465 1 Others ALL 5 0 5 M 4 466 0 Paper feeding Feeding retry number set ting PFP lower drawer Plain paper ALL 5 0 5 M Sets the number of times o...

Page 144: ... sec 1 480 Paper feeding Default setting of paper source PPC 0 0 5 SYS 0 A4 LT 1 LCF 2 Upper drawer 3 Lower drawer 4 PFP upper drawer 5 PFP lower drawer 1 481 Paper feeding Automatic change of paper source PPC 1 0 2 SYS Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out 0 OFF 1 ON Changes to the dr...

Page 145: ...f polygonal motor on standby 0 Rotated The rota tional speed is set at 08 490 1 Stopped 1 486 Laser Timing of auto clearing of polygonal motor pre run ning rotation ALL 0 0 2 SYS Switches the polygonal motor to the standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the pre running At this code the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set 0 15 sec 1 30 sec 2 45 sec Thi...

Page 146: ...rface Default setting of density adjustment PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Automatic 1 Manual Center 1 508 Image Custom Mode setting PPC 0 0 3 SYS 0 Not used 1 Custom Mode 1 when Text Photo is set as a base 2 Custom Mode 2 when Text is set as a base 3 Custom Mode 3 when Photo is set as a base 1 509 Image Error diffusion and dither setting at a photo mode Custom Mode PPC 1 0 1 SYS Switches the image processing me...

Page 147: ...e ALL 9 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 523 Fuser Pre running time for first printing Envelope ALL 10 0 15 M 0 Invalid 1 1 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 11 12 sec 12 14 sec 13 16 sec 14 18 sec 15 20 sec 1 525 0 Fuser Temperature dropswitching time se...

Page 148: ...0 20 M 0 None 1 Pattern 1 2 Pattern 2 3 Pattern 3 4 Pattern 4 5 Pattern 5 6 Pattern 6 7 Pattern 7 8 Pattern 8 9 Pattern 9 10 Pattern 10 11 Pattern 11 12 Pattern 12 13 Pattern 13 14 Pattern 14 15 Pattern 15 16 Pattern 16 17 Pattern 17 18 Pattern 18 19 Pattern 19 20 Manual adjustment 1 536 0 Fuser Temperature drop setting during printing Center ther mistor The first drop ALL 1 0 10 M This code is va...

Page 149: ...f pri mary secondary direction at AMS PPC 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 607 User interface Default setting of RADF mode PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Continuous feeding by pressing the START button 1 Single feeding by setting original on the tray 1 610 User interface Key touch sound of control panel ALL 1 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON 1 611 User interface Book type original priority PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Left page to right page...

Page 150: ... 1 622 User interface Department management setting Printer PRT 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 623 User interface Department management setting Scanner SCN 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 624 User interface Department management setting List print PRT 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 625 User interface Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jam ming PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON Start printing when the sc...

Page 151: ...Automatic Sorting Mode setting RADF PPC 2 0 4 SYS 0 Invalid 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 GROUP 4 ROTATE SORT 1 642 User interface Default setting of Sorter Mode PPC 0 0 4 SYS 0 NON SORT 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 GROUP 4 ROTATE SORT 1 645 User interface Correction of reproduction ratio in editing copy PPC 10 0 10 SYS Sets the reproduction ratio for the X in 1 printing including mag azine sort to the Reproduction rati...

Page 152: ... 1 653 User interface Cascade operation setting PRT 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON 1 657 User interface Direction priority for date and time stamp printing PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Short edge 1 Long edge 1 658 User interface Auto Job Start setting for bypass feed printing PRT 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper auto matically into the equip ment when it is placed on the bypass tray 0 OFF Press the START bu...

Page 153: ...yed for some reason Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management func tion is not set on In this case initialize the area with this code This area is normally initialized at the factory 3 673 General Trial period setting PRT SCN 254 1 60 SYS Sets the trial period from 1 to 60 days This setting is effective only when the default value is 254 Once the def...

Page 154: ...building all databases ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases 3 685 General Rebuilding all databases related to address book ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book 3 686 General Rebuilding all databases related to log ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the log 3 689 FAX Adaptation of paper source priority selection FAX 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not subjected for APS judgment 1 Subjected for A...

Page 155: ...not be set again on security grounds 5 699 Scram bler board Erasing all data in HDD ALL This setting is effective only when the scram bler board is installed 3 701 FAX Destination setting for FAX FAX EUR 5 UC 4 JPN 0 Other 1 0 25 SYS 0 Japan 1 Asia 2 Australia 3 Hong Kong 4 U S A Canada 5 Germany 6 U K 7 Italy 8 Belgium 9 Netherlands 10 Finland 11 Spain 12 Austria 13 Switzerland 14 Sweden 15 Denma...

Page 156: ...lled service initial registration ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 OFF 1 Start 2 Only certification is scanned 1 719 Mainte nance Remote controlled service tentative password ALL SYS Maximum 10 letters 11 720 Mainte nance Status of remote con trolled service initial regis tration Display only ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not registered 1 Registered 2 721 Mainte nance Service center call function ALL 2 0 2 SYS 0 OFF 1 Notifies ...

Page 157: ...ts 11 743 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies Service technician s name ALL SYS Maximum 50 letters 11 744 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies Service technician s tele phone number ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the Monitor Pause button 11 745 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies Service technician s E mail addr...

Page 158: ...letters Needed at initial regis tration 11 774 Mainte nance Remote Display setting of Service Notification button ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not displayed 1 displayed 1 775 Mainte nance Remote Sending error contents of equipment ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 776 Mainte nance Remote Setting total counter trans mission interval Hour Hour Minute Minute ALL SYS 1 777 Mainte nance Remote Destination E mail ad...

Page 159: ... polling day selection Saturday ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 794 Mainte nance Information of supplies set ting of toner cartridge ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 796 Mainte nance Remote controlled service lengthened interval polling End of month ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 797 Mainte nance Firmware download ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Accepted 1 Prohibited 1 798 General Notifying address of trial...

Page 160: ...rature control lower limit Envelope Center themistor ALL 8 0 12 M 0 130 C 1 135 C 2 140 C 3 145 C 4 150 C 5 155 C 6 160 C 7 165 C 8 170 C 9 175 C 10 180 C 11 185 C 12 120 C 4 804 1 Side themistor ALL 10 0 12 M 4 805 Charger Main charger bias correc tion Text Photo OHP film PRT 98 0 255 M Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment 05 210 1 806 Charger Main charger bias correc tion Toner...

Page 161: ... humidity 0 All valid 1 All invalid 2 Valid only in auto toner sensor 3 All valid except transfer and separa tion 1 849 General Power source setting for destination ALL SAD 1 Others 0 0 1 M 0 Other than SAD 1 SAD 1 859 Devel oper Developer bias DC correc tion Toner saving mode PRT 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment 05 205 1 860 Devel oper Developer bias DC correc tion ...

Page 162: ...ation transformer DC correction H ALL 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the separation trans former DC output adjustment 05 233 1 871 Separa tion Separation transformer DC correction L ALL 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the separation trans former DC output adjustment 05 235 1 872 Laser Laser power correction Normal PRT 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the laser power adjust ment 05 286 1 873 ...

Page 163: ... Others T371SY0XXXX 2 903 Version Engine ROM version ALL 371M XXX 2 905 Version Scanner ROM version ALL 371S XXX 2 907 Version RADF ROM version ALL DF XXXX 2 908 Version Finisher ROM version ALL SDL XX FIN XX 2 915 Version Fax board ROM version FAX F562 XXX 2 916 Version NIC board ROM version ALL X XXX 2 920 Version FROM basic section soft ware version ALL VX XX X XX 2 921 Version FROM internal pr...

Page 164: ... Invalid 12 947 General Initialization after software version upgrade ALL Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upgraded 3 948 General Mode setting by pressing Energy Saver button for a while ALL 0 0 1 SYS Sets the mode to enter when the Energy Saver button is pressed for a while 0 Sleep Mode 1 Auto Shut Off Mode 1 949 General Automatic interruption page setting during pri...

Page 165: ...S Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller 0 Pause the job 1 Stop the job 1 976 Elec tronic Fil ing Equipment name setting to a folder when saving files ALL 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether or not adding the equipment name to the folder when saving files 0 Not add 1 Add 1 977 Network Switching of extended ASCII code in catFs file system ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 ISO885...

Page 166: ... ISO 21 German 28 ISO 60 Danish Nor wegian 29 ISO 69 French 30 Windows 3 0 Latin 1 31 MC Text 32 PC Cyrillic 33 ITC Zapf Dingbats 34 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 35 PC 775 36 PC 1004 37 Symbol 38 Windows Baltic 39 Wingdings 1 980 Elec tronic Fil ing Electronic Filing data retention period when NIC board is not installed Public Box ALL 0 0 999 SYS 0 Retention OFF 1 to 999 1 to 999 days 1 981 Elec tronic Fil...

Page 167: ...003 Network Speed setting of Ethernet ALL 3 1 3 NIC 1 10 MBPS 2 100 MBPS 3 Automatic 12 1004 Network NIC Web password ALL NIC Writing only Current setting is not dis played Maximum 31 letters 12 1005 Network Availability of IP ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 1006 Network Address Mode ALL 2 1 5 NIC 1 Fixed IP address 2 Dynamic IP address 3 Dynamic IP address without AutoIP 4 Dynamic IP...

Page 168: ...ure DDNS 5 Multi secure DDNS 12 1021 Network Availability of SLP ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 1023 Network NetBios name ALL UTY Maximum 15 letters 12 1024 Network Name of WINS server or IP address Primary ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 1025 Network Name of WINS server or IP address Secondary ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 1026 Network Availability of Bindery ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Availab...

Page 169: ...y of POP3 clients ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not available 12 1047 Network FQDN or IP address to POP3 server ALL NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 12 1048 Network Types of POP3 server ALL 1 1 3 NIC 1 Automatic 2 POP3 3 APOP 12 1049 Network Login name to POP3 server ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters 12 1050 Network Login password to POP3 ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters 12 1051 Network E mail reception interval Unit Minut...

Page 170: ... of LPD client ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1076 Network TCP port number of LPD ALL 515 1 65535 NIC 12 1077 Network LPD queue name ALL NIC Maximum 31 letters 12 1078 Network Availability of IPP ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1079 Network Availability of IPP port number 80 ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1080 Network TCP port number of IPP ALL 631 1 65535 NIC 12 1081 Network IPP printe...

Page 171: ...om 0 to 9 and from A to F 12 1100 Network Method of SMTP server authentication ALL 5 1 5 NIC 1 Plain 2 Login 3 Cram MD5 4 Digest MD5 5 Disable 12 1101 Network Login name for SMTP server authentication ALL NIC Maximum 64 letters 12 1102 Network Login password for SMTP server authentication ALL NIC Maximum 64 letters 12 1103 Network Rendezvous setting ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1104 Network ...

Page 172: ...job build has been per formed 5 1000 5 to 1000 times 1 1132 General Default screen selection of the User Function menu ALL 1 0 1 SYS Selects the default screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the USER FUNCTIONS button 0 ADDRESS 1 COUNTER 1 1133 Paper feeding Feeding direction setting of envelope ALL 0 0 1 SYS Sets the feeding direc tion of envelopes 0 Envelope flap comes on its tr...

Page 173: ...Counts up the heater control time accumu lated when power of the equipment is ON but does not count at the Sleep Mode When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode 1 1376 Counter Toner cartridge drive counter ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the rotation number of the toner cartridge 1 1378 Counter Counter for period of time fuser un...

Page 174: ...es Thick paper 3 ALL 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode 1 1388 Image process ing Number of output pages OHP film ALL 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared this counter value is also clear...

Page 175: ...g Feeding retry counter upper limit value PFP lower drawer ALL 0 8 digits M 1 1400 Paper feeding Feeding retry counter upper limit value Bypass feed ALL 0 8 digits M 1 1401 Paper feeding Feeding retry counter upper limit value LCF ALL 0 8 digits M 1 1410 Counter Counter for period of toner cartridge rotation time ALL 0 8 digits M Counts up the period of rotation time of the toner cartridge 1 1411 ...

Page 176: ...ng ALL When this code is per formed the equipment cannot be started up This setting is enabled only when the GP 1050 is installed 3 1428 Data overwrite kit Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing ALL When this code is per formed the equipment cannot be started up This setting is enabled only when the GP 1050 is installed 3 1432 Network Mode only for Private Print ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Normal mode 1 Mode ...

Page 177: ...LL 0 0 4294967 295 SYS 2 1487 Network From address assign ment method when it is given an authentication ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 User name Domain name 1 LDAP search 2 Use the address registered in From field of E mail set ting 1 1488 Network ID setting of LDAP server for From address assign ment ALL 0 0 4294967 295 SYS 2 1489 Network Setting for From address edit at Scan to Email ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not permi...

Page 178: ...rence set ting ALL 0 0 1 SYS Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen 0 Service technician reference 1 Toner cartridge ref erence 1 1506 Pixel counter Toner empty determination counter setting ALL 0 0 1 SYS Selects the counter to determine toner empty 0 Output pages 1 Pixel counter 1 1507 Pixel counter Threshold setting for toner empty determination Output pages AL...

Page 179: ...n the copy function and toner car tridge reference Unit page 2 1555 Pixel counter Number of output pages Toner cartridge reference PRT 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages con verted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner car tridge reference Unit page 2 1556 Pixel counter Number of output pages Toner cartridge reference FAX 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output ...

Page 180: ...e Unit 0 01 2 1613 Pixel counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and toner car tridge reference Unit 0 01 2 1619 Pixel counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PRT 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and toner car tridge reference Unit 0 01 2 1624 Pixel counter Aver...

Page 181: ... 10 ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distribu tions in the printer func tion are displayed Unit page 14 1650 1 5 1 10 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 2 10 1 15 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 3 15 1 20 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 4 20 1 25 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 5 25 1 30 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 6 30 1 40 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 7 40 1 60 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 8 ...

Page 182: ... 3 Present driving counts Means the present drive counts 1 count 2 seconds 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced Means the recommended drive counts for replacement 1 count 2 seconds 5 Driving counts at the last replacement Means the drive counts at the last replacement 6 Present output pages for control Means the present number of output pages for controlling 7 Present driving counts for con...

Page 183: ...UDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 64 000 74 000 90 000 Sub code 4 120 000 120 000 120 000 Ozone filter 1198 0 to 8 1199 Default values of code 1198 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 128 000 148 000 180 000 Sub code 4 240 000 240 000 240 000 Developer material 1200 0 to 8 1201 Default values of code 1200 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 ...

Page 184: ...80 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller Lower drawer 1292 0 1 2 8 1293 Default values of code 1292 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller LCF 1294 0 1 2 8 1295 Default values of code 1294 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 160 000 160 000 160 000 Feed roller Upper drawer 1298 0 1 2 8 1299 Default va...

Page 185: ...00 80 000 Feed roller PFP lower drawer 1322 0 1 2 8 1323 Default values of code 1322 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Feed roller Bypass unit 1324 0 1 2 8 1325 Default values of code 1324 e STUDIO200L 230 280 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller PFP upper drawer 1328 0 1 2 8 1329 Default values of code 1328 e STUDIO200L 230 2...

Page 186: ...he following operations note the current counter values Fig 2 4 3 Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the START button The value entered is displayed on the left of the and the ENTER button is displayed Note Note The value can be erased by pressing the CLEAR button to change as long as the START but ton is not pressed The value on the left of the is reset to 0 by pressing the CL...

Page 187: ...e ENTER button to complete overwriting of the counter value Note Note The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying overwriting the value when the CANCEL button is pressed Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup counter SYS board B onto the value of the total counter LGC board A Fig 2 6 A B 05 12 ...

Page 188: ...R or INTERRUPT Sets or changes value CLEAR Corrects value CANCEL 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START ENTER or INTERRUPT Adjustment value cannot be changed 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL or CLEAR Automatic setting ENTER or INTERRUPT Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR Sets or chang...

Page 189: ...RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Select icon START CANCEL ENTER or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key 1st setting Digital key 2nd setting START START CANCEL ENTER or INTERRUPT CLEAR Corrects value CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM 0 8 POWER POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key or Software keyb...

Page 190: ... 6 5 201 General Destination selection ALL EUR 0 UC 1 JPN 2 0 2 M 0 EUR 1 UC 2 JPN 1 202 User interface Counter installed externally ALL 0 0 3 M 0 No external counter 1 Coin controller 2 Copy key card 3 Key copy counter 1 203 General Line adjustment mode ALL 0 0 1 M 0 For factory shipment 1 For line Field 0 must be selected 1 204 User interface Auto clear timer setting ALL 3 0 10 SYS Timer to retu...

Page 191: ... Black letter on white background 1 White letter on black background 1 209 User interface Default setting of filing for mat when E mailing ALL 0 0 4 SYS 0 TIFF Multi 1 PDF Multi 2 Not used 3 TIFF Single 4 PDF Single 1 210 Paper feeding Paper size A6 R feeding widthwise direction PRT 148 105 148 432 105 297 M 10 213 User interface Display of REVERSE ORDER button ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not displayed 1 Disp...

Page 192: ...aper size for PFP lower drawer ALL EUR A4 UC LG JPN B4 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size 9 229 Paper feeding Paper size A3 feeding widthwise direction ALL 420 297 182 432 140 297 M 10 230 Paper feeding Paper size A4 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 297 210 182 432 140 297 M 10 231 Paper feeding Paper size A5 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 210 148 182 432 140 297 M 10 232 Paper f...

Page 193: ...er feeding Paper size 8K feeding widthwise direction ALL 390 270 182 432 140 297 M 10 245 Paper feeding Paper size 16K R feed ing widthwise direction ALL 270 195 182 432 140 297 M 10 247 Paper feeding Memory 2 Paper size bypass feed ing non standard type feeding widthwise direction ALL 148 100 148 432 100 297 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed non standard type into MEMORY 2 10 248 Paper ...

Page 194: ...when the registration sensor is ON 1 253 Mainte nance Error history display ALL SYS Displaying of the latest 20 errors data 2 254 Paper feeding LT A4 LD A3 PRT 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available 0 Valid The data is printed on A4 A3 when LT LD is selected or vice versa 1 Invalid The mes sage...

Page 195: ...Disables PFP or LCF When the upper and lower drawers are installed as the paper feeder of the equip ment 16 PFP and LCF not installed 17 PFP upper drawer type installed 18 PFP upper drawer and lower drawer type installed 19 LCF installed 20 Disables functions of PFP or LCF Disables the lower drawer when the upper and lower drawers are installed as the paper feeder of the equip ment 32 PFP and LCF ...

Page 196: ...te 1 263 User interface Administrator s password Maximum 10 digits ALL 123456 10 digits The password can be entered in alphabets and figures A Z a z 0 9 within 10 digits 11 264 Network File retention period SCN 30 0 999 SYS 0 No limits 1 to 999 1 to 999 days 1 265 Network Maximum data capacity at E mailing SCN 30 2 30 SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 1 266 Network Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX ALL 30 2...

Page 197: ...ts the default value for the partial size of E mail to be transmitted when creating a tem plate 0 Not divided 1 64 2 128 3 256 4 512 5 1024 6 2048 Unit KB 1 274 FAX Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX FAX 0 0 4 SYS Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creat ing a template 0 Not divide 1 128 2 512 3 1024 4 2048 Unit KB 1 276 U...

Page 198: ...heck ing capacity of HDD partitions ALL 12 1 24 SYS Sets the search inter val of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD parti tion Unit Hour Related code 08 271 1 290 Network Raw printing job Duplex PRT 1 0 1 SYS 0 Valid 1 Invalid 1 291 Network Raw printing job Paper size PRT EUR 6 UC 2 JPN 6 0 13 SYS 0 LD 1 LG 2 LT 3 COMP 4 ST 5 A3 6 A4 7 A5 8 A6 9 B4 10 B5 11 FOLIO 12 13 LG 13 8 5 x...

Page 199: ...000 44 9999 SYS Sets the font pitch from 0 44 to 99 99 A hun dredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value 1 298 Network Raw printing job PCL font size PRT 1200 400 99975 SYS Sets the font size from 4 to 999 75 A hun dredfold of the font size is defined as the setting value 1 299 Network Raw printing job PCL font number PRT 0 0 79 SYS Sets the PCL font num ber 1 300 User interface Max...

Page 200: ... 10 ST 305 11 COMP 305 12 13 LG 305 13 8 5 x 8 5 305 14 16K 305 15 8K 305 16 Others 306 0 Counter Number of output pages in printer func tion A3 PRT 0 8 digits SYS Counts the output pages in the printer function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 306 1 A4 306 2 A5 306 3 A6 306 4 B4 ...

Page 201: ... 307 10 ST 307 11 COMP 307 12 13 LG 307 13 8 5 x 8 5 307 14 16K 307 15 8K 307 16 Others 308 0 Counter Number of output pages in FAX func tion A3 FAX 0 8 digits SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX func tion for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 308 1 A4 308 2 A5 308 3 A6 308 4 B4 308...

Page 202: ... 10 ST 312 11 COMP 312 12 13 LG 312 13 8 5 x 8 5 312 14 16K 312 15 8K 312 16 Others 313 0 Counter Number of scanning pages in scanning function A3 SCN 0 8 digits SYS Counts the scanning pages in the scanning function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 313 1 A4 313 2 A5 313 3 A6 313 ...

Page 203: ...10 ST 314 11 COMP 314 12 13 LG 314 13 8 5 x 8 5 314 14 16K 314 15 8K 314 16 Others 315 0 Counter Number of transmitted pages in FAX function A3 FAX 0 8 digits SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX func tion for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large sized paper 08 352 and the definition setting of large sized paper 08 353 4 315 1 A4 315 2 A5 315 3 A6 315 4 B4...

Page 204: ...n according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 320 1 Counter Small PPC 0 8 digits SYS 14 320 2 Counter Total PPC 0 8 digits SYS 14 321 0 Counter Display of number of output pages in printer func tion Large PRT 0 8 digits SY...

Page 205: ...nction according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 323 1 Counter Small PRT 0 8 digits SYS 14 323 2 Counter Total PRT 0 8 digits SYS 14 327 0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in copier func tion Large PPC 0 8 dig...

Page 206: ...unction according to its size large small Large Number of output pages of large sized paper defined at 08 353 Small Number of output pages other than set as large sized paper Total Total number out put pages of all paper sizes 14 329 1 Counter Small SCN 0 8 digits SYS 14 329 2 Counter Total SCN 0 8 digits SYS 14 330 0 Counter Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX function Large FAX 0 8 dig...

Page 207: ...YS 14 332 2 Counter Total FAX 0 8 digits SYS 14 335 0 Counter Display of total number of pages Large ALL 0 8 digits SYS Displays the total num ber of pages in the copier printer scanning FAX functions 14 335 1 Counter Small ALL 0 8 digits SYS 14 335 2 Counter Total ALL 0 8 digits SYS 14 337 Paper feeding Paper size 10 R feeding widthwise direction ALL 241 105 148 432 105 297 M 10 338 Paper feeding...

Page 208: ...is double counter 1 353 Counter Definition setting of large sized paper Fee charging system counter ALL 0 0 1 M 0 A3 LD 1 A3 LD B4 LG FOLIO COMP 8K 1 356 Counter Counter for upper drawer feeding ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from upper drawer 2 357 Counter Counter for lower drawer feeding ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of sheets fed from lower drawer 2 358 Counter Counter fo...

Page 209: ...mat ting 2 393 Counter Number of errors in HDD Printer PRT 0 8 digits SYS The number of error is reset at HDD format ting 2 398 Laser Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching ALL 0 8 digits M Counts the number of time the polygonal motor has switched its rotational speed between normal rota tion and standby rota tion 2 399 Laser Accumulated time of polyg onal motor at normal rota tion ...

Page 210: ...thermistor ALL 8 0 12 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 1 409 Fuser Fuser roller temperature at energy saver mode Center thermistor ALL 0 0 13 M 0 OFF 1 40 C 2 50 C 3 60 C 4 70 C 5 80 C 6 90 C 7 100 C 8 110 C 9 120 C 10 130 C 11 140 C 12 150 C 13 160 C 1 410 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Center thermistor P...

Page 211: ...170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 414 Devel oper Toner density life correc tion switching ALL 0 0 7 M 0 Unchanged Default 1 Approx 0 3 wt higher 2 Approx 0 6 wt higher 3 Approx 0 9 wt higher 4 Approx 0 2 wt lower 5 Approx 0 4 wt lower 6 Approx 0 6 wt lower 7 Approx 0 9 wt lower 1 417 Fuser Pre running time for first printing Thick paper 3 ALL 10 0 15 M 0 ...

Page 212: ...r ALL 7 0 12 M 0 130 C 1 135 C 2 140 C 3 145 C 4 150 C 5 155 C 6 160 C 7 165 C 8 170 C 9 175 C 10 180 C 11 185 C 12 120 C 4 433 1 Side ther mistor ALL 5 0 12 M 4 437 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Center thermistor Thick paper 2 ALL 8 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 438 Fuser Fuser...

Page 213: ...rmistor ALL 0 0 13 M 0 OFF 1 40 C 2 50 C 3 60 C 4 70 C 5 80 C 6 90 C 7 100 C 8 110 C 9 120 C 10 130 C 11 140 C 12 150 C 13 160 C 1 449 Paper feeding Incorrect paper size jam detection switching ALL 0 0 1 M 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 450 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Side thermistor Plain paper ALL 8 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C...

Page 214: ...ture during printing Side thermistor OHP film ALL 8 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 455 Image process ing Toner supply amount cor rection Toner motor control ALL 0 0 5 M Corrects the supply amount of the fresh toner driving period of the toner motor into the developer unit 0 x1 0 1 x0 75 2 x0 5 3 ...

Page 215: ...4 R or FOLIO without transporting in reverse with no scanning LT series Judges whether it is LT R or LG without trans porting in reverse with no scanning 1 Enable 1 AMS A series Judges whether it is A4 R or FOLIO by transport ing without scanning in reverse to detect its length LT series Judges whether it is LT R or LG by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length APS The same a...

Page 216: ...ing LCF Plain paper ALL 5 0 5 M Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF 4 468 1 Others ALL 5 0 5 M 4 471 Paper feeding Paper size Postcard feeding widthwise direction ALL 148 100 148 432 100 297 M Postcard is sup ported only for JPN model 10 477 General Machine identification information ALL Refer to content 0 1 M Default value Lower drawer model 0 Upper drawer model 1 2 478 Las...

Page 217: ...83 Laser Pre running rotation of polygonal motor ALL 0 0 2 SYS Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the origi nal is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened 0 Valid when using RADF and the origi nal is set manually 1 Invalid 2 Valid when using RADF only 1 484 Laser Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear...

Page 218: ... motor rotation in the energy saving mode ALL 0 0 1 M 0 Stopped 1 10 000 rpm 1 491 Transfer Transfer charger bias cor rection H at duplexing ALL 149 0 255 M Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper at duplexing 1 492 Transfer Transfer charger bias cor rection C at duplexing ALL 139 0 255 M Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the center area o...

Page 219: ...185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 516 Fuser Temperature setting of warming up Side thermistor ALL 9 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170 C 7 175 C 8 180 C 9 185 C 10 190 C 11 195 C 12 200 C 13 205 C 14 210 C 1 518 Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing Side thermistor Thick paper 3 ALL 9 0 14 M 0 140 C 1 145 C 2 150 C 3 155 C 4 160 C 5 165 C 6 170...

Page 220: ...ly when 20 is set to 08 535 Setting value x 5 sec from 0 to 1 000 sec later 4 525 1 The sec ond drop ALL 38 0 200 M 4 525 2 The third drop ALL 75 0 200 M 4 525 3 The fourth drop ALL 75 0 200 M 4 526 Fuser Pre running time for first printing OHP film ALL 0 0 15 M 0 Invalid 1 0 sec 2 2 sec 3 3 sec 4 4 sec 5 5 sec 6 6 sec 7 7 sec 8 8 sec 9 9 sec 10 10 sec 11 12 sec 12 14 sec 13 16 sec 14 18 sec 15 20...

Page 221: ...he third drop ALL 3 0 10 M 4 536 3 The fourth drop ALL 3 0 10 M 4 537 0 Fuser Temperature drop setting during printing Side ther mistor The first drop ALL 1 0 10 M 4 537 1 The sec ond drop ALL 2 0 10 M 4 537 2 The third drop ALL 3 0 10 M 4 537 3 The fourth drop ALL 5 0 10 M 4 550 Image Default setting of original mode PPC 0 0 3 SYS 0 Text Photo 1 Photo 2 Text 3 Custom Mode 1 601 User interface Set...

Page 222: ... 1 Summer time 1 613 User interface Paper size selection for OTHER button PPC EUR FOLIO UC COMP JPN A5 R SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size 9 614 Network Local I F time out period PRT 6 1 50 SYS Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I F printing USB or par allel 1 1 0 sec 2 1 5 sec 50 25 5 sec in increments of 0 5 sec 1 615 General Size information of...

Page 223: ...anagement setting List print PRT 1 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 625 User interface Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jam ming PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON Start printing when the scanning of each page is fin ished 1 627 User interface Rotation printing at the non sorting ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not rotating 1 Rotating 1 628 User interface Direction priority of original image PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Automatic 1...

Page 224: ...MM DD 1 DD MM YYYY 2 MM DD YYYY 1 641 User interface Automatic Sorting Mode setting RADF PPC 2 0 4 SYS 0 Invalid 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 GROUP 4 ROTATE SORT 1 642 User interface Default setting of Sorter Mode PPC 0 0 4 SYS 0 NON SORT 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 GROUP 4 ROTATE SORT 1 645 User interface Correction of reproduction ratio in editing copy PPC 10 0 10 SYS Sets the reproduction ratio for the X in 1 print...

Page 225: ...N 1 653 User interface Cascade operation setting PRT 0 0 1 SYS 0 OFF 1 ON 1 657 User interface Direction priority for date and time stamp printing PPC 0 0 1 SYS 0 Short edge 1 Long edge 1 658 User interface Auto Job Start setting for bypass feed printing PRT 0 0 1 SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper auto matically into the equip ment when it is placed on the bypass tray 0 OFF Press the START b...

Page 226: ...for some reason Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management func tion is not set on In this case initialize the area with this code This area is normally initialized at the factory 3 673 General Trial period setting PRT SCN 254 1 60 SYS Sets the trial period from 1 to 60 days This setting is effective only when the default value is 254 Once the default...

Page 227: ...ilding all databases ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases 3 685 General Rebuilding all databases related to address book ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book 3 686 General Rebuilding all databases related to log ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the log 3 689 FAX Adaptation of paper source priority selection FAX 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not subjected for APS judgment 1 Subjected for APS...

Page 228: ...ot be set again on security grounds 5 699 Scram bler board Erasing all data in HDD ALL This setting is effective only when the scram bler board is installed 3 701 FAX Destination setting for FAX FAX EUR 5 UC 4 JPN 0 Other 1 0 25 SYS 0 Japan 1 Asia 2 Australia 3 Hong Kong 4 U S A Canada 5 Germany 6 U K 7 Italy 8 Belgium 9 Netherlands 10 Finland 11 Spain 12 Austria 13 Switzerland 14 Sweden 15 Denmar...

Page 229: ...30 SYS 0 0 00 to 2359 23 59 1 716 Mainte nance Remote controlled service Writing data of self diag nostic code ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Prohibited 1 Accepted 1 717 Mainte nance Remote controlled service response waiting time Timeout ALL 3 1 30 SYS Unit Minute 1 718 Mainte nance Remote controlled service initial registration ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 OFF 1 Start 2 Only certification is scanned 1 719 Mainte nance Remo...

Page 230: ... 11 740 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies User s E mail address ALL SYS Maximum 192 letters List 256 digits 11 741 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies User s address ALL SYS Maximum 100 letters 11 742 Mainte nance Remote Automatic ordering func tion of supplies Service number ALL 0 5 digits SYS Maximum 5 digits 11 743 Mainte nance Remote Automati...

Page 231: ... SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 769 Mainte nance Remote Total counter information transmission setting ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 770 Mainte nance Remote Total counter transmission date setting ALL 1 1 31 SYS 1 to 31 1 771 Mainte nance Remote PM counter notification set ting ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 772 Mainte nance Dealer s name ALL SYS Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial regis trat...

Page 232: ...ote controlled service polling day selection Tuesday ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 787 Mainte nance Remote controlled service polling day selection Wednesday ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 788 Mainte nance Remote controlled service polling day selection Thursday ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 789 Mainte nance Remote controlled service polling day selection Friday ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Invalid ...

Page 233: ...9 175 C 10 180 C 11 185 C 12 120 C 4 801 1 Side themistor ALL 6 0 12 M 4 802 0 Fuser Temperature control lower limit Thick paper 2 Center themistor ALL 8 0 12 M 0 130 C 1 135 C 2 140 C 3 145 C 4 150 C 5 155 C 6 160 C 7 165 C 8 170 C 9 175 C 10 180 C 11 185 C 12 120 C 4 802 1 Side themistor ALL 9 0 12 M 4 803 0 Fuser Temperature control lower limit Thick paper 3 Center themistor ALL 8 0 12 M 0 130 ...

Page 234: ...on C ALL 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the separation trans former DC output adjustment 05 234 1 833 Devel oper Developer bias DC correc tion Text Photo OHP film PRT 108 0 255 M Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment 05 205 1 834 Devel oper Developer bias DC correc tion Toner Saving Mode OHP film PRT 108 0 255 M 1 835 Devel oper Developer bias DC correc tion Text Photo OHP film PP...

Page 235: ... the value of the main charger bias adjustment 05 210 1 866 Charger Main charger bias correc tion Text PPC 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment 05 210 1 867 Charger Main charger bias correc tion Photo PPC 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment 05 210 1 868 Transfer Transfer transformer DC correction H ALL 128 0 255 M Corrects the value of t...

Page 236: ...Fuser Temperature control lower limit Plain paper Low tempera ture Center themistor ALL 7 0 12 M 0 130 C 1 135 C 2 140 C 3 145 C 4 150 C 5 155 C 6 160 C 7 165 C 8 170 C 9 175 C 10 180 C 11 185 C 12 120 C 4 896 1 Side themistor ALL 5 0 12 M 4 900 Version System firmware ROM ver sion ALL JPN T377SY0JXXX UC T377SY0UXXX EUR T377SY0EXXX Others T377SY0XXXX 2 903 Version Engine ROM version ALL 377M XXX 2...

Page 237: ...LL VXXX XXX X 2 938 Version Web UI data in HDD Version Language 5 ALL VXXX XXX X 2 939 Version Web UI data in HDD Version Language 6 ALL VXXX XXX X 2 944 Version HD version ALL JPN T377HD0JXXX UC T377HD0UXXX EUR T377HD0EXXX Others T377HD0XXXX 2 945 Network Two way setting of RawPort 9100 ALL 2 1 2 UTY 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 947 General Initialization after software version upgrade ALL Perform this c...

Page 238: ...CR CR LF CR LF 1 975 General Job handling when print ing is short paid with coin controller ALL 1 0 1 SYS Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller 0 Pause the job 1 Stop the job 1 976 Elec tronic Fil ing Equipment name and user name setting to a folder when saving files ALL 0 0 2 SYS Sets whether or not adding the equipment name and user name to the...

Page 239: ...SO 21 German 28 ISO 60 Danish Nor wegian 29 ISO 69 French 30 Windows 3 0 Latin 1 31 MC Text 32 PC Cyrillic 33 ITC Zapf Dingbats 34 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 35 PC 775 36 PC 1004 37 Symbol 38 Windows Baltic 39 Wingdings 1 980 Elec tronic Fil ing Electronic Filing data retention period when NIC board is not installed Public Box ALL 0 0 999 SYS 0 Retention OFF 1 to 999 1 to 999 days 1 981 Elec tronic Fil i...

Page 240: ...nication speed and settings of Ethernet ALL 1 1 5 NIC 1 Auto 2 10MBPS Half Duplex 3 10MBPS Full Duplex 4 100MBPS Half Duplex 5 100MBPS Full Duplex 12 1006 Network Address Mode ALL 2 1 3 NIC 1 Fixed IP address 2 Dynamic IP address DHCP 3 Dynamic IP address DHCP without AutoIP 12 1007 Network Domain name ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters 12 1008 Network IP address ALL NIC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 De...

Page 241: ...The Network related serial number of the equipment appears at serial 12 1024 Network Name of WINS server or IP address Primary ALL UTY 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1025 Network Name of WINS server or IP address Secondary ALL UTY 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1026 Network Availability of Bindery ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Available 2 Not a...

Page 242: ... POP3 ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters 12 1051 Network E mail reception interval Unit Minute ALL 5 0 4096 NIC 12 1052 Network TCP port number of POP3 client ALL 110 1 65535 NIC 12 1055 Network TCP port number of FTP client ALL 21 1 65535 UTY 12 1057 Network Login name to FTP server ALL SYS Maximum 31 letters 11 1058 Network Login password to FTP server ALL SYS Maximum 31 letters 11 1059 Network Availabi...

Page 243: ...ber of the equipment appears at serial 12 1082 Network IPP printer location ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 1083 Network IPP printer information ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 1084 Network IPP printer information more ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 1085 Network Installer of IPP printer driver ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 1086 Network IPP printer Make and Model ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 1087 ...

Page 244: ...d for SMTP server authentication ALL NIC Maximum 64 letters 12 1103 Network Rendezvous setting ALL 1 1 2 NIC 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1104 Network Link local host name ALL MFP_ serial NIC Maximum 127 letters The Network related serial number of the equipment appears at serial 12 1105 Network Service name setting ALL Refer to content NIC Maximum 63 letters The Network related serial number of the equip...

Page 245: ...ntext Name1 ALL UTY Maximum 127 letters 12 1130 User interface Job Build Function ALL 1 0 1 SYS Sets the Job Build Function 0 Invalid 1 Valid 1 1131 User interface Maximum number of time job build performed ALL 2000 5 2000 SYS Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been per formed 5 2000 5 to 2000 times 1 1132 General Default screen selection of the User Function menu ALL 1 0 1 SYS Select...

Page 246: ...e 6 byte data is divided by a colon at every 2 bytes 2 1143 Network NetwareUserAuthContext Name2 ALL UTY Maximum 127 letters 12 1144 Network NetwareUserAuthTree Name3 ALL UTY Maximum 47 letters 12 1145 Mainte nance Remote Counter notification Remote FAX setting ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the MONITOR PAUSE button 11 1148 Network NetwareUserAuthContext Name3 ALL UTY Maximum 127 lett...

Page 247: ...r is also reset in sync at the PM support mode 1 1385 Image process ing Number of output pages Thick paper 1 ALL 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode 1 1386 Image process ing Number of output pages Thick paper 2 ALL 0 8 digits M Counts up when the registratio...

Page 248: ...e Upper drawer ALL 0 8 digits M When the number of feeding retry 08 1390 to 08 1395 exceeds the setting value the feeding retry will not be performed subse quently In case 0 is set as a setting value however the feeding retry continues regard less of the counter set ting value 1 1397 Paper feeding Feeding retry counter upper limit value Lower drawer ALL 0 8 digits M 1 1398 Paper feeding Feeding re...

Page 249: ...M data all clearing ALL When this code is per formed the equipment cannot be started up This setting is enabled only when the GP 1060 is installed 3 1428 Data overwrite kit Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing ALL When this code is per formed the equipment cannot be started up This setting is enabled only when the GP 1060 is installed 3 1429 User interface Margin width Top Bottom Left Right ALL ...

Page 250: ...ic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet Remote ALL 1 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 1439 Paper feeding Automatic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet Local ALL 1 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 1440 Network IP Conflict Detect ALL 1 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1441 Network SNTP Enable ALL 2 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1442 Network SNTP Polling rate ALL 24 1 168 Data obtaini...

Page 251: ...nt automatic registration func tion setting ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 1473 General User data management limitation setting ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 1474 General User data management limitation Setting by number of print outs ALL 0 7 digits SYS 0 9 999 999 0 9 999 999 sheets 1 1476 Network Restriction on Address book operation by adminis trator ALL 0 0 1 SYS Some restrictions...

Page 252: ...en it is given an authentication ALL 0 0 1 SYS 0 Not permitted 1 Permitted 1 1486 Network Server setting for LDAP user authentication ALL 0 0 4294967 295 SYS 2 1487 Network From address assign ment method when it is given an authentication ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 User name Domain name 1 LDAP search 2 Use the address registered in From field of E mail set ting 1 1488 Network ID setting of LDAP server for F...

Page 253: ... regis tration 1 1497 Network e Filing Access Mode for Client ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 Mode 1 1 Mode 2 2 Mode 3 1 1498 FAX Inbound FAX function Forwarding by TSI 1 0 1 SYS 0 OFF Function disabled 1 ON Function enabled 1 1530 0 Counter Number of output pages 1 UP Duplex printing PPC 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages 4 1530 1 2 UP Duplex printing PPC 0 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output ...

Page 254: ...iver Encryption system ALL 1 1 3 1 TKIP 2 AES 3 Dynamic WEP 12 1665 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN driver Transmission output power ALL 1 1 5 1 100 2 50 3 25 4 12 5 5 min 12 1666 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate ALL 1 1 2 1 Auto 2 Manual 12 1667 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate value ALL 1 1 12 1 1 2 2 3 5 5 4 11 5 6 6 9 7 12 8 18 9 24 10 36 11 48 12 54 12 1668 Wirel...

Page 255: ... path name in full where the client certificate is located Maximum 255 letters 12 1684 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for CA self cer tificate ALL This should be the path name in full where the CA self certificate is located Maximum 255 letters 12 1685 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN supplicant EAP user name ALL This should be the user name when the EAP TLS is used 12 1686 Wireless LAN W...

Page 256: ...ce file name which can obtain a seed to ini tialize the WEP PRNG for xsupplicant Maximum 255 letters 12 1697 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN supplicant CRL directory designation ALL This should be the path name of the directory in full where the CRL file is located Maximum 255 letters 12 1699 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN supplicant EAP authentication type ALL 1 1 3 This setting is for the EAP authenticatio...

Page 257: ...apabil ity output in TLS clien tHello message can be selected 1 LOW 2 MIDDLE 3 HIGH 12 1708 User interface Selectable security level EAP TLS ALL 1 1 3 These are the security level which can be selected from the user interface This setting is not applied in case of PEAP LOW and MIDDLE is manda tory for PEAP 1 LOW MIDDLE HIGH 2 MIDDLE HIGH 3 HIGH 12 1709 Blue tooth Bluetooth Installation status of o...

Page 258: ...inimum area 2 ALL IP filter minimum area 2 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1723 Network IP address range for IP fil ter Maximum area 2 ALL IP filter maximum area 2 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1724 Network IP address range for IP fil ter Minimum area 3 ALL IP filter minimum area 3 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000...

Page 259: ...ilter minimum area 7 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1733 Network IP address range for IP fil ter Maximum area 7 ALL IP filter maximum area 7 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1734 Network IP address range for IP fil ter Minimum area 8 ALL IP filter minimum area 8 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default value 000 000 000 000 12 1735 N...

Page 260: ...tp server OFF ON ALL 2 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1745 Network SSL setting SSL ftp server Port ALL 990 1 65535 Port number to FTP Server 12 1746 Network SSL setting SSL LDAP Client OFF ON ALL 2 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 Invalid 12 1747 Network SSL setting SSL LDAP Client Port ALL 636 1 65535 Port number to LDAP Server 12 1748 Network SSL setting SSL POP3 Client OFF ON ALL 2 1 2 OFF ON 1 Valid 2 In...

Page 261: ...g server s IP address acquired by DHCP ALL 2 1 2 POP3 Server Option 70 Post Office Server Address 1 Enabled 2 Disabled This value is used only when DHCP is enabled 12 1762 Network Enabling server s IP address acquired by DHCP ALL 2 1 2 SNTP Server Option 42 NTP Server Address 1 Enabled 2 Disabled This value is used only when DHCP is enabled 12 1763 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN supplicant Direction of...

Page 262: ...es 4 5 minutes 5 10 minutes 6 15 minutes 7 30 minutes 1 1779 Network Default data saving direc tory of Scan to File ALL 0 0 2 SYS 0 Local directory 1 REMOTE 1 2 REMOTE 2 1 1781 0 Network Notification of scan job When job completed ALL 0 0 1 SYS Sets the notification method of scan job completion 0 Invalid 1 Valid 4 1781 1 On error ALL 0 0 1 SYS 4 1782 Network File name format of Save as file and E...

Page 263: ...L 3 3 6 SYS Sets the extension dig its of the file to be saved 3 Auto 4 4 digits 5 5 digits 6 6 digits 1 1850 Network IPP MaxConnection ALL 16 1 16 NIC Number of maximum connections IPP 12 1851 Network IPP ActiveConnection ALL 10 1 16 NIC Number of active con nections IPP 12 1852 Network LPD MaxConnection ALL 10 1 16 NIC Number of maximum connections LPD 12 1853 Network LPD ActiveConnection ALL 10...

Page 264: ...0 Function off 1 Function on 1 1928 Network Role Based Access LDAP search index ALL 0 0 4294967 295 SYS 5 1929 User interface Keyboard layout for Lan guage 1 ALL 0 0 2 SYS 1 QWERTY layout for Europe 2 QWERTZ layout 3 AZERTY layout 1 1930 User interface Keyboard layout for Lan guage 2 ALL 1 0 2 SYS 1 QWERTY layout for Europe 2 QWERTZ layout 3 AZERTY layout 1 1931 User interface Keyboard layout for ...

Page 265: ...vice authentication PDC BDC time out period ALL 60 1 180 NIC Unit Second 12 1943 Network User authentication PDC BDC time out period ALL 30 1 180 NIC Unit Second 12 1944 Network Device User authentication Method of Windows domain authentication ALL 1 1 3 NIC 1 Auto 2 Kerberos 3 NTLMv2 12 1950 Network SMB signature for SMB server ALL 1 1 3 UTY 1 Auto 2 Valid 3 Invalid 12 1951 Network SMB signature ...

Page 266: ... TEC 2 230 1958 Network PDC of device authentica tion ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 1959 Network BDC of device authentica tion ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters 12 Setting mode 08 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Code Classifi cation Items Func tion Default Accept able value RAM Contents Proce dure 05 11 ...

Page 267: ...erence set ting ALL 0 0 1 SYS Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen 0 Service technician reference 1 Toner cartridge ref erence 1 1506 Pixel counter Toner empty determination counter setting ALL 0 0 1 SYS Selects the counter to determine toner empty 0 Output pages 1 Pixel counter 1 1507 Pixel counter Threshold setting for toner empty determination Output pages A...

Page 268: ...e copy function and toner car tridge reference Unit page 2 1555 Pixel counter Number of output pages Toner cartridge reference PRT 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output pages con verted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner car tridge reference Unit page 2 1556 Pixel counter Number of output pages Toner cartridge reference FAX 8 digits SYS Counts the number of output page...

Page 269: ...Unit 0 01 2 1613 Pixel counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PPC 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and toner car tridge reference Unit 0 01 2 1619 Pixel counter Average pixel count Toner cartridge reference PRT 0 0 10000 SYS Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and toner car tridge reference Unit 0 01 2 1624 Pixel counter Averag...

Page 270: ...ranges The number of output pages in each range is displayed In this code the distribu tions in the printer func tion are displayed Unit page 14 1650 1 5 1 10 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 2 10 1 15 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 3 15 1 20 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 4 20 1 25 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 5 25 1 30 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 6 30 1 40 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 7 40 1 60 PRT 8 digits SYS 14 1650 8 60 1...

Page 271: ...ment 3 Present driving counts Means the present drive counts 1 count 2 seconds 4 Recommended driving counts to be replaced Means the recommended drive counts for replacement 1 count 2 seconds 5 Driving counts at the last replacement Means the drive counts at the last replacement 6 Present output pages for control Means the present number of output pages for controlling 7 Present driving counts for...

Page 272: ...DIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 64 000 74 000 90 000 Sub code 4 120 000 120 000 120 000 Ozone filter 1198 0 to 8 1199 Default values of code 1198 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 128 000 148 000 180 000 Sub code 4 240 000 240 000 240 000 Developer material 1200 0 to 8 1201 Default values of code 1200 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 3 5 6 7 8...

Page 273: ...282 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller Lower drawer 1292 0 1 2 8 1293 Default values of code 1292 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller LCF 1294 0 1 2 8 1295 Default values of code 1294 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 160 000 160 000 160 000 Feed roller Upper drawer 1298 0 1 2 8 1299 Default v...

Page 274: ...0 80 000 Feed roller PFP lower drawer 1322 0 1 2 8 1323 Default values of code 1322 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Feed roller Bypass unit 1324 0 1 2 8 1325 Default values of code 1324 e STUDIO202L 232 282 Sub codes 0 2 8 0 0 0 Sub code 1 80 000 80 000 80 000 Pickup roller PFP upper drawer 1328 0 1 2 8 1329 Default values of code 1328 e STUDIO202L 232 28...

Page 275: ...ng the following operations note the current counter values Fig 2 7 3 Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the START button The value entered is displayed on the left of the and the ENTER button is displayed Note Note The value can be erased by pressing the CLEAR button to change as long as the START but ton is not pressed The value on the left of the is reset to 0 by pressing th...

Page 276: ...the ENTER button to complete overwriting of the counter value Note Note The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying overwriting the value when the CANCEL button is pressed Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup counter SYS board B onto the value of the total counter LGC board A Fig 2 9 A B ...

Page 277: ...er is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio per standard paper size This Print ratio per standard paper size is called Pixel count This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption number of output pages per cartridge ...

Page 278: ...e major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows Original Data coverage Original Data density Original Print mode Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above such as environment individual difference of equipment difference in lot quality of materials toner density and drum surface potential The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous p...

Page 279: ...h the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode 08 1503 Service technician reference This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter C...

Page 280: ... on A4 LT size with 6 of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4 LT size with 2 of laser emission Pixel count 5 Print count 4 Printing 2 pages on A3 LD size with solid copy Laser emits to all pixels Pixel count 100 Print count 4 Printing 2 pages on A3 LD size with 6 of laser emission Pixel count 6 Print count 4 Average pixel count and latest pixel count There are 2 types of the value calculated as th...

Page 281: ... 08 1504 Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen toner cartridge reference or service technician reference is selected 08 1505 Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected After the toner empty is detected by the auto toner sensor this counter checks...

Page 282: ...on becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well In this case the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages Therefore this trend needs to be grasped for the service The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows Fig 2 11 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge 6 12 60 X X...

Page 283: ...cian reference 1 Toner cartridge reference in the setting mode 08 1505 The following screen is displayed when the buttons USER FUNCTIONS COUNTER and PIXEL COUNTER are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is as usual turned ON The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting mode 08 1505 Fig 2 12 Informati...

Page 284: ... reference Fig 2 15 Data list of service technician reference PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST TONERCARTRIDGE No 0 1 2 DATE 20040711 20040711 20040711 FAX 12345 12345 12345 PPC 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 TOTAL 45678 45678 45678 2004 7 11 09 55 Print Count LT A4 Average Pixel Count Latest Pixel Count PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST SERVICEMAN No 0 1 2 DATE 20040711 20040711 20040711 FAX 12345 12345 123...

Page 285: ...nce Copier function Print count page 1553 1548 Average pixel count 1613 1592 Latest pixel count 1639 1606 Printer function Print count page 1555 1550 Average pixel count 1619 1593 Latest pixel count 1640 1607 FAX function Print count page 1556 1551 Average pixel count 1625 1594 Latest pixel count 1634 1608 Total Average pixel count 1624 1595 Pixel count distribution page Copier function 1649 Print...

Page 286: ... 1566 Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed 08 1518 Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date is displayed 08 1510 The date 08 1502 was performed is stored Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed The date 08 1503 was performed is ...

Page 287: ...621 622 623 624 629 672 Sorting 627 634 641 649 Original direction 628 Image shift 636 Edit copying 645 646 Box printing 647 953 954 X in 1 650 Annotation 651 657 Automatic transfer 660 661 Indicator 671 Priority drawer 689 Media type 697 Job Build 1130 1131 Scanner Position 305 306 Distortion 308 Reproduction ratio 340 Carriage position 359 Image Margin 430 431 432 433 434 0 to 1 435 436 437 438 ...

Page 288: ...ation 497 0 to 5 Polygonal motor 398 399 478 479 483 484 485 486 488 489 490 Power correction 872 873 875 876 877 Development Auto toner 200 201 Auto toner 414 455 High voltage transformer Main charger bias 210 Developer bias 205 Transfer bias 220 221 222 Separation bias 233 234 235 Transfer bias 491 492 493 830 868 869 Main charger bias 805 806 807 808 809 826 864 865 866 867 Developer bias 833 8...

Page 289: ...6 Rendezvous 1103 SMB 1117 1136 ASCII code 977 Link local host name 1104 Service name 1105 Host name 1112 Internet FAX 1114 1485 Workgroup name 1124 Private print 1432 Function 1433 1434 Scan to E mail 1484 From Address 1487 1488 1489 E mail domain 1491 Counter External counter 202 381 683 975 1126 Counter copy 257 Paper size 305 0 to 16 306 0 to 16 307 0 to 16 308 0 to 16 312 0 to 16 313 0 to 16 ...

Page 290: ...0 764 765 794 1145 Firmware download 797 Emergency Mode 710 711 Others Equipment number 976 Toner recycle 280 Destination 201 701 849 Line 203 Private printing 259 Local I F 614 Memory 615 Partition 662 666 667 Clear 693 Trial period 673 695 798 799 Banner 678 679 680 681 Database 684 685 686 HDD 670 690 691 694 1422 1424 1426 Control panel 692 Scrambler board 696 698 699 Data overwrite kit 633 Eq...

Page 291: ...4 295 296 297 298 299 973 978 979 1856 1857 Copy volume 300 Original counter 302 Custom Mode 508 Energy saving 601 970 AMS 605 Sound 610 Book duplexing 611 Summer time 612 Paper size 613 Department management 617 620 621 622 623 624 629 672 Sorting 627 634 641 649 Original direction 628 Image shift 636 1429 1430 Edit copying 645 646 Box printing 953 954 X in 1 650 Annotation 651 657 Automatic tran...

Page 292: ...9 240 241 242 243 244 245 337 338 339 340 341 471 Paper feeding 254 255 481 619 658 659 988 1133 Retry 463 0 to 1 464 0 to 1 465 0 to 1 466 0 to 1 467 0 to 1 468 0 to 1 482 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 Paper size 224 225 226 227 228 247 248 249 256 Blank copying prevention 625 Incorrect paper size jam 449 Tab paper 1437 1438 1439 Detection method of 13 LG 1492 Laser ...

Page 293: ...46 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 FTP 1055 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1089 1090 1091 1092 MIB 1063 Community 1065 1066 TRAP 1067 1068 1069 1070 Raw TCP 945 1073 1074 LPD 1075 1076 1077 1852 1853 IPP 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1850 1851 Novell 1093 1094 SerchRoot 1095 Print queue 1096 Rendezvous 1103 SMB 1117 1136 1950 1951 ASCII code 977 Link ...

Page 294: ... 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 Supplicant 1679 1680 1681 1682 1684 1685 1686 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1696 1697 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1763 1764 1765 1766 1763 1764 1765 1766 Bluetooth Bluetooth 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 Counter External counter 202 381 683 975 1126 Counter copy 257 Paper size 305 0 to 16 306 0 to 16 307 0 to 16 308 0 to 16 312 0 to 16 313 ...

Page 295: ...mber 976 Toner recycle 280 Destination 201 701 849 Line 203 Private printing 259 Local I F 614 Memory 615 Partition 662 666 667 Clear 693 Trial period 673 695 798 799 Banner 678 679 680 681 Database 684 685 686 HDD 670 690 691 694 1422 1424 1426 Control panel 692 Scrambler board 696 698 699 Data overwrite kit 633 Equipment number 995 Toner recycle 838 Machine identification information 477 Tempera...

Page 296: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ERROR CODE AND SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 2 260 ...

Page 297: ...While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON The following message will be displayed Fig 3 1 3 Key in code 200 and press the START button The display changes as follows Fig 3 2 Notes A indicates the controlled value of the auto toner sensor output Press the Up or Down button to change the value B indicates the output voltage of the auto toner sensor 2 30 V in the above case The drum dev...

Page 298: ... 45 V 7 If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245 press the Up or Down button to adjust the value manually Note Note The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows 8 Press the ENTER or INTERRUPT button The drum developer unit etc are stopped and the following is displayed Fig 3 5 9 Turn the power OFF 10 Install the toner cartridge Button to be pressed Value A Value...

Page 299: ...rimary scanning direction Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed 401 b Primary scanning data laser writing start position 411 c Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direc tion Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed 421 d Secondary scanning data laser writing start posi tion 441 440 444 443 442 445 e Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing 498 3 Scanner ...

Page 300: ...rformed nor mal copy mode Fig 3 6 0 1 5 POWER ENTER INTERRUPT Digital keys START Enter codes Operation keys Display Current adjustment value Adjustment value newly entered If no entering YYY is displayed Power OFF ON Exit the Adjustment Mode Test copy Digital keys Enter adjustment values Value ZZZ is stored replacing values YYY If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values return to step ...

Page 301: ...inches or shorter 2 The adjustment of Post card is for Japan only Procedure 1 Perform the test print according to the following procedure Paper type Weight Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF ADU Bypass feed Plain paper 64 80 g m2 17 20 lb 450 1 452 1 448 1 449 1 457 455 1 458 1 Thick paper 1 81 105g m2 21 28 lb 469 1 470 1 471 1 472 1 473 474 1 460 1 Thick paper 2 106 ...

Page 302: ...propriate amount while confirming the leading edge position is not shifted As a tentative countermeasure the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increas ing the aligning amount 2 Check if any transfer void is occurring If there is a transfer problem try the values in descending order as 31 30 29 until the transfer void disappears At the same time confirm if any paper jam occurs Also...

Page 303: ...Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 1 FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustment value is the longer the distance A becomes approx 0 125 mm step B Primary scanning data laser writing start position Printer Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON Adjustment Mode 2 Press 1 FAX A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out Use A3 LD from standard ...

Page 304: ...ith 10 mm squares is printed out Use A3 LD from standard drawer of the equipment Refer to Perform 08 477 and check the value If the value is 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 3 Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 10th line at the leading edge of the paper to the 30th line of the grid pattern Normally the 1st line of t...

Page 305: ...re it on the top side of the grid pattern 4 Check if the distance D is within 52 0 5 mm 5 If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again Adjustment Mode Key in the code shown above START Key in an acceptable value shown above ENTER or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 1 3 for duplexing FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustme...

Page 306: ...stance E again Adjustment Mode Key in code 498 START 0 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 ENTER or INTERRUPT Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 3 FAX A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustment value is the longer the distance E becomes approx 0 05 mm step E 2 Adjustment for short sized paper Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON Adjust...

Page 307: ... 200 0 5 mm 0 125 mm step B 05 411 Lower drawer A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 05 mm step Key in the same value for 05 410 C 05 421 Lower drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 125 mm step D 05 441 Lower drawer A3 LD 440 Upper drawer A4 LT 444 PFP A4 LT 443 LCF A4 LT 442 Bypass feed A4 LT 445 Duplexing A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 4 mm step E 05 498 0 Lower drawer A3 LD 498 1 Upper drawer A4 LT 52 0 5 mm 0 05 mm step A 21 6 1 B E D 6...

Page 308: ... 445 498 for duplexing FAX A 05 401 Upper drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 125 mm step B 05 411 Upper drawer A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 05 mm step Key in the same value for 05 410 C 05 421 Upper drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 125 mm step D 05 440 Upper drawer A3 LD 441 Lower drawer A4 LT 444 PFP A4 LT 443 LCF A4 LT 442 Bypass feed A4 LT 445 Duplexing A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 4 mm step E 05 498 0 Upper drawer A3 LD 498 1 Uppe...

Page 309: ...t in the order of step 1 and 2 Step 1 In case of A Tighten the mirror 3 adjustment screw CW In case of B Loosen the mirror 3 adjustment screw CCW Step 2 In case of C Tighten the mirror 1 adjustment screw CW In case of D Loosen the mirror 1 adjustment screw CCW 5 Apply the screw locking agents to the adjust ment screws 2 areas Recommended screw lock agent Manufacturer Three Bond Product name 1401E ...

Page 310: ... value is 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance A is within the range of 260 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 405 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the ENTER o...

Page 311: ...ue If the value is 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance B is within the range of 10 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 306 START Key in a value acceptable value...

Page 312: ... the value If the value is 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance C is within the range of 200 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 340 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Pre...

Page 313: ...e If the value is 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance D is within the range of 10 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 305 START Key in a value acceptable val...

Page 314: ...s 0 use the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 430 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the ENTER or the INTERRUPT butt...

Page 315: ...the lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2 1 0 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 432 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the ENTER or the INTERRUPT button stored ...

Page 316: ...he lower drawer If the value is 1 use the upper drawer 4 Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2 1 0 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above Adjustment Mode Key in the code 433 START Key in value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the ENTER or the INTERRUPT button stored ...

Page 317: ... button 4 Press the ENTER or INTERRUPT button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job 6 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 503 931 501 933 504 932 Manual density mode center value The larger the value is the darker the image ...

Page 318: ...t of P 3 21 3 3 1 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 593 943 594 945 595 944 Gamma slope adjustment One s place 0 equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9 Select the gamma slope angle The larger the value is the larger the angle becomes Ten s place 0 equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9 Select the gamma slope angle of the low density area The smaller the...

Page 319: ... Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 3 21 3 3 1 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 620 922 621 924 622 923 Sharpness adjustment Key in the following values depend ing on the original mode One s place 1 Text Photo 2 Photo 5 Text Ten s place 0 Use Default value 1 to 9 Change intensity The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes Example o...

Page 320: ...tment Mode 05 The values in are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings if necessary make adjust ment using the following procedure Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 3 21 3 3 1 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 570 913 571 915 572 914 Range correction for original manua...

Page 321: ...spotted text When the value increases the faint text is improved When the value decreases the smudged text is improved Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default 192 Note Note Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo 648 928 Adjustment of smu...

Page 322: ...ipment goes back to the ready state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job 8 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 667 0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased text becomes lighter Acceptable values 0 to 10 Notes 1 Set not to reverse the large a...

Page 323: ...ode and press the START button 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct the keyed in value press the CLEAR button 4 Press the ENTER or INTERRUPT button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job 6 If the desired text density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Language Remarks PS PCL 654 655 When the value increas...

Page 324: ...s back to the ready state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job 8 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Toner mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Standard Toner saving 672 0 to 4 676 0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased text becomes lighter Acceptable values 0 to 10 Notes 1 S...

Page 325: ...he ready state 5 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform scanning job 6 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 845 847 846 Manual density mode center value The larger the value is the darker the image becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 850 852 851 Manual density mode light step value The larger th...

Page 326: ...he value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform scanning job 8 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 865 0 867 0 866 0 Reproduction ratio 25 to 40 Key in the following values depend ing on the original mode One s place 1 Text Photo 5 Photo 2 Text Ten s place 0 Use Default va...

Page 327: ...hat of the text density Adjustment Mode 05 Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 3 29 3 5 1 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 825 827 826 Range correction for original manually set on the original glass The following are the default values set for each original mode Text Photo 12 Photo 12 Text 12 Each digit stands for One s place Automatic densit...

Page 328: ...e image changes slightly in text mode because it is treated as a simple binary format image Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 3 29 3 5 1 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 835 837 836 Background peak for range correction When the value increases the back ground low density area of the image is not output Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default text...

Page 329: ...llation of the high volt age transformer jig Digital Tester terminal Connect with the black cable of the high volt age transformer jig Connect with the red cable thick line of the high voltage trans former jig Connect with the red cable thin line of the high voltage transformer jig terminal Connect with the white cable of the high voltage transformer jig Function switch DC Full scale range 1000 V ...

Page 330: ... out the process unit Note Note Be careful not to let the connector and the harness be caught when installing the pro cess unit after adjustment Fig 3 19 4 Install the high voltage transformer jig and fix it with 2 screws Note Note Be careful not to let the connector and the harness be caught Fig 3 20 5 Fix the green cable of the high voltage trans former jig to the frame of the equipment Fig 3 21...

Page 331: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 35 3 6 Install the door switch jig 7 Close the transfer cover Fig 3 22 Door switch jig Front cover opening closing switch ...

Page 332: ...main charger adjustment Fig 3 24 Front cover opening closing switch Ground to the machine frame green cable terminal Connect with the white cable terminal Connect with the black cable Front cover opening closing switch Ground to the machine frame green cable terminal Connect with the white cable terminal Connect with the red cable thick line ...

Page 333: ...280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 37 3 D Connection for transfer separation charger adjustment Fig 3 25 Front cover opening closing switch Ground to the machine frame green cable terminal Connect with the white cable terminal Connect with the red cable thin line ...

Page 334: ...enter the other adjustment code 0 5 POWER Press the front cover opening closing switch UP or DOWN Adjust the value YYY to satisfy the following table Digital keys START Enter the code POWER OFF ON Code 210 Adjustment value 495 5V Code No Current set value Keys to press Display SET or INTERRUPT Adjusted value YYY is stored in memory 1 Developer bias Main charger 205 357 5V Code 221 Adjustment value...

Page 335: ...act with the drum Is the process unit worked correctly Is the toner density low Is the copy paper fed straight Is the copy paper abnormally moist Is the rotation of the registration roller normal Is the separation output different from the set value Is the developer bias value an appropriate one Are the transfer separation charger case grounded Is the high voltage transformer grounded Note for adj...

Page 336: ...er separation charger case grounded Is the high voltage transformer grounded Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface Note for adjustment When poor paper separation occurs Increase the separation output value under the following conditions Remember that if the separation output value is increased too much blotched image occurs and separation performance becomes low Poor separation...

Page 337: ...nt side Fig 3 29 Rear side Fig 3 30 Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the car riage wires by the tension springs Note Note Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal Carriage 2 Idler pulley Tension spring Wire pulley Bracket for carriage 1 Hook Carriage wire Carriage 2 Carriage wire Bracket for carriage 1 Hook Wire pulley Tensio...

Page 338: ...and 2 positions Procedure 1 Move the carriage 2 toward the exit side 2 Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket make the sections A and B of the carriage 2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up Fig 3 31 Carriage 2 Pulley bracket Rear Front Exit side frame A B ...

Page 339: ... rail make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw up the front rear sides of the bracket to fix it Note Note Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage 2 touch with the exit side frame Fig 3 32 Carriage 1 Rear Front Exit side frame Bracket Bracket C D ...

Page 340: ...ar sides The number of turns to be wound are as follows 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss 4 turns toward the boss side Note Note Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys Do not twist the wire Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that th...

Page 341: ...round the pulleys attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires Notes When the wire holder jig is attached make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the arm and the jig Fig 3 34 Arm Wire holder jig ...

Page 342: ...ome part of its components must not be replaced in the field since the unit is precisely adjusted If any of the components is defective replace the whole unit When replacing the unit do not loosen or remove the 4 screws indicated with the arrows Fig 3 35 Handle the unit with care Do not hold the lens and adjusted part hold the unit as shown below Fig 3 36 ...

Page 343: ...s correct before this adjustment 1 Place a ruler on the original glass in the primary scanning direction and make a copy on A4 LT sized paper at 100 reproduction ratio 3 If each mark on the rulers differs perform the adjustment with the following procedures Procedure 2 Compare the copied ruler with the actual ruler Fig 3 37 1 Take off the original glass and lens cover 2 Loosen 2 screws fixing the ...

Page 344: ...nds to the movement amount of the lens unit Fig 3 39 Note Note Fine adjustment can be made in the Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction printer on the copied ruler and actual ruler match 4 Tighten 2 screws fixing the lens unit 5 Attach the lens cover and original glass Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio 6 Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and act...

Page 345: ...rection in the lower figure The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side Move the guide to the rear side Arrow B direction in the lower figure Fig 3 40 Fig 3 41 Bypass feeding 1 Loosen the screen 2 Move the entire guide to the front or rear side 3 Tighten the screw Drawer feeding 1 Loosen 2 screws 2 Move the entire guide to the front or rear side 3 Tighten the screws Fig 3 42 Fig 3 43 F...

Page 346: ... the equipment 3 Take out the developer unit from the process unit 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the developer material cover and discharge the developer material Note Note Discharge the developer material from the rear side being careful not to let it be scat tered on the gear Fig 3 44 5 Turn the adjustment screw to widen the gap so that the jig can be inserted in it Turning the screw clockwise ...

Page 347: ...sh the doctor sleeve jig lightly Fig 3 46 7 Insert the gauge 0 40 of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade Confirm that the jig moves smoothly to the front and rear side and the gauge 0 50 cannot be inserted into the gap Fig 3 47 8 Confirm that the side seals are attached on the toner scattering prevention sheet Fig 3 48 Screw Doctor sleeve jig Toner scat...

Page 348: ...ne 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 52 9 Attach the developer material cover and tighten 2 screws Note Note After the developer material has been replaced adjust the auto toner sensor See P 3 1 3 1 Adjustment of Auto Toner Sensor Fig 3 49 Developer material cover ...

Page 349: ...uring adjustment Procedure 1 Open the RADF and then attach 2 position ing pins to the equipment The positioning pins have been attached at the rear of the right hand hinge of the RADF Fig 3 50 2 Close the RADF to check that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF If they do not adjust them according to the following procedure Fig 3 51 3 Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2 sc...

Page 350: ...en the RADF and then loosen 2 hand screws 1 turn status of tentative fixing Fig 3 54 6 Remove the positioning pin at the front side Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into the hole at the rear side of the RADF While peering inside from the front side fit the posi tions of the pin and hole by moving the RADF right and left Fig 3 55 Screw ...

Page 351: ...While peering inside from the left side close the RADF Check the positions of the holes of the RADF and pins and then fit their posi tions by moving the RADF back and forth For the front side also adjust the RADF position right and left Make sure not to dis locate the positions of the pin and hole at the rear side Fig 3 57 9 Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws Close the RADF and then check agai...

Page 352: ...late Open and close the RADF to check again that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF Remove the positioning pins after checking it Replace the positioning pins at the rear of the right hand hinge of the RADF Fig 3 60 12 Place the platen sheet on the original glass with the semi round cutout toward you Align the platen sheet against the left and rear side of the original gl...

Page 353: ...ent of RADF position Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check Test Mode 03 267 Procedure 1 Adjustment standard Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass becomes 0 5 mm 0 3 Fig 3 62 2 Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the right...

Page 354: ... 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 58 3 Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the left hinge CW The height of the hinge becomes high CCW The height of the hinge becomes low Fig 3 64 ...

Page 355: ...nfirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly Prior to this adjustment of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted 1 Step 1 Case A Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side of the original P 3 62 3 10 5 Adjustment of aligning Case B Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side of the original P 3 62 3 10 5 Adjustment of aligning Fig 3 65 A B Paper Orig...

Page 356: ... hinge position scribed line and be sure not to move it from the hinge position 0 5 mm or further Otherwise image failures such as a jitter may occur 3 Step 3 Case E Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side of the original P 3 63 3 10 6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing Case F Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side of the original P 3 63 3 10 6 A...

Page 357: ...OM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment Mode 05 Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF Also make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor adjustment have been performed Refer to P 2 43 2 2 5 Adjustment mode 05 e STUDIO200L 230 280 for the details Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not ini...

Page 358: ... 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 62 3 10 5 Adjustment of aligning Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3 10 3 Fig 3 69 Rear side of the original Skew of paper Rear side of the original ...

Page 359: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 63 3 3 10 6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3 10 3 Fig 3 70 Screw of paper ...

Page 360: ...move the screw on the left and take off the plate spring Fig 3 71 2 Align B of the front frame with the edge of the reverse solenoid and temporarily fix the reverse solenoid with the screw on the right Fig 3 72 3 While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is put in the position to be turned ON by press ing it in the direction of an arrow loosen the screw on the right to adjust the reverse sole noid...

Page 361: ...3 4 Fix the plate spring temporarily with the screw on the left Then press the plate spring slightly in the direction of an arrow and tighten the screw in the position where the gap D between the plunger and the flapper lever is eliminated Fig 3 74 D D Flapper lever Plunger ...

Page 362: ...NT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 66 3 10 8 Adjustment of RADF opening closing switch Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40 45 mm within the empty weight falling limit Fig 3 75 Glass surface A Center ...

Page 363: ... 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 67 3 3 10 9 Adjustment of RADF opening closing sensor Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30 35 mm within the empty weight falling limit Fig 3 76 Glass surface A Center ...

Page 364: ...f tray volume Procedure 1 While pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously turn the power ON 2 Narrow the original guide to the limit 3 Input the code 367 4 Press the START button Fig 3 77 5 Extend the original guide to the limit 6 Input the code 368 7 Press the START button 8 Turn the power OFF Fig 3 78 ...

Page 365: ...the RADF is not installed in the correct position Note Note Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF A Checking 1 Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins the positioning pins are installed to the back side of the hinge which is on the left side of the RADF Fig 3 79 2 Remove the platen sheet Fig 3 80 05 11 ...

Page 366: ...ot be fitted into the holes perform the adjustment according to the following procedure 3 Close the RADF and check if the positioning pins fit the holes on the RADF Fig 3 81 1 Remove the right hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 3 82 2 Loosen the left hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 3 83 05 11 ...

Page 367: ...TMENT 3 71 3 3 Loosen the hinge screws at the front side Fig 3 84 4 Position the pins with the holes on the RADF by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes when the RADF is closed Fig 3 85 5 Tighten the left hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 3 86 05 11 ...

Page 368: ... 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 72 6 Loosen the hole position adjustment screws on the right hand side Fig 3 87 7 Match the screw hole positions Fig 3 88 8 Install the right hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 3 89 05 11 ...

Page 369: ...2 ADJUSTMENT 3 73 3 9 Loosen the hinge screws at the front side Fig 3 90 10 Place the platen sheet on the original glass and align it to the top left corner Close the RADF gently and open it to check if the platen sheet is attached properly Fig 3 91 05 11 ...

Page 370: ...e power ON while pressing 0 and 3 simultaneously Key in 267 and then press the START button The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given length of time 3 Visually check the gap between platen guide holder A and upper surface of the original glass B from the left hand side of the equipment If the value is not within the tolerance perform the adjustment according to the following procedure Tolerance o...

Page 371: ... the hinges Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF Turn it clockwise Heightened Turn it counterclockwise Lowered Fig 3 93 Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF Turn it clockwis Lowered Turn it counterclockwise Heightened Fig 3 94 05 11 ...

Page 372: ...orizontal lines in the following procedure Fig 3 95 Chart Original Simplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF select 1 Sided 1 Sided and press the START button 2 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image Duplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray ...

Page 373: ...plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew Fig 3 96 2 If the image skew is C as shown in the figure below shift the aligning plate in the direction of and if D shift it to Fig 3 97 Fig 3 98 Shift the aligning plate in the direction of Shift the aligning plate in the direction of C D 05 11 ...

Page 374: ...h the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew Fig 3 99 2 If the image skew is C as shown in the figure below shift the aligning plate in the direction of and if D shift it to Fig 3 100 Fig 3 101 Shift the aligning plate in the direction of Shift the aligning plate in the direction of C D 05 11 ...

Page 375: ...opy Duplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF select 2 Sided 2 Sided and press the START button 2 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy B Adjustment Simplex copying 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously key in 365 and then press the START button 2 Enter the v...

Page 376: ...image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF Also the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly A Checking Check the image using the chart original with a center line in the following procedure 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF 2 Press the START button 3 Fold the copy in half and chec...

Page 377: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 81 3 Note Note Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0 042 mm Fig 3 105 3 Press the ENTER button H 05 11 ...

Page 378: ...llowing procedure 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF 2 Press the START button 3 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension I B Adjustment 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 0 and 5 simultaneously 2 Key in 357 and then press the START button If the copy image dimension I is larger than the chart dimension enter a value sm...

Page 379: ...232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 83 3 3 11 7 Adjustment of RADF Opening Closing Sensor Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 100 mm or less within the empty weight falling limit Fig 3 107 Fig 3 108 A 05 11 ...

Page 380: ...er controller PC board as shown in P 3 84 Fig 3 109 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board The front jogging plate moves to the home position Fig 3 109 3 Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in P 3 84 Fig 3 110 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board The rear jogging plate moves to the home position Fig 3 1...

Page 381: ...ing plate home position sensor S6 with reference to the index EX 1 If the width is 319 mm in step 4 the dif ference from the standard is 2 mm it requires relocation of the sensor in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm EX 2 If the width is 316 mm in step 4 the dif ference from the standard is 1 mm it requires relocation of the sensor in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm Fig 3 113 Home position sensor p...

Page 382: ...ig 3 114 2 Place several sheets of A4 LT paper on the processing tray and adjust the rear jogging plate At this time adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jog ging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0 5 mm Fig 3 115 3 With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step 2 adjust the front jogging plate in the same manner Screw Rear jogging plate Butted Paper Rear jogging pla...

Page 383: ...e the processing tray unit 2 Loosen the mounting screw of the front rear jogging plate adjusting plate then move the adjusting plate to the left and the right Fig 3 116 3 Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front rear jogging rack plate and the sensor is 1 5 mm to 2 0 mm Fig 3 117 Jogging plate adjusting plate Jogging plate adjusting plate Screw Screw Adjusting plate Adju...

Page 384: ...nting screws and detach the grip unit Fig 3 118 3 Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension by the tension spring Fig 3 119 4 Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit the slack of a belt is lightly taken then tighten the screw on the tension arm plate Fig 3 120 Screw Grip unit Screw Screw Tension arm plate Screw Tension arm plate Returni...

Page 385: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT 3 89 3 5 Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly Fig 3 121 Returning roller shaft ...

Page 386: ... sensor PC board 3 Remove the stack tray 4 Remove the stack tray drive unit 5 Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate front rear Then remove the fix ing screw Perform the same for the front and the rear Note Note When removing the mounting screw be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below Fig 3 122 Fig 3 123 Screw Stack tr...

Page 387: ... upper tray angle Procedure 1 Remove the front cover Fig 3 124 2 Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow Fig 3 125 3 The tension becomes loose While pushing the bracket down hold the tray and move it up or down to adjust the angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a visual check Fig 3 126 Bracket ...

Page 388: ... 280 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 92 4 After adjustment tighten the fixing screw of the bracket Note Note If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped tooth Fig 3 127 ...

Page 389: ...n The front jogging plate moves to its home position and stops Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 When at the home position The front jogging plate moves over a specific position and stops at the home position Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 Rear jogging plate motor When not at the home position The rear jogging plate moves to the home position and stops Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 When at the home positi...

Page 390: ...er stack tray lower limit sensor is turned ON Press SW2 again Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 Stapler motor The stapler motor stops after the sta pling operation Press the stapler safety switch S14 Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 Shipping position operation The upper and lower stack trays move to the shipping position and stop Turn OFF the joint sensor S4 Setting Item Operation To stop ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 391: ...mode of the host machine Procedure 1 Set SW1 on the finisher controller PCB as follows Fig 3 128 2 Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the finisher controller PCB a required number of times Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0 16 mm To move the folding position in the direction press the PSW1 To move the folding position in the direction press the PSW...

Page 392: ...ensor PCB LED PCB or waste full sensor waste full photosensor PCB waste full LED PCB has been replaced Procedure 1 Shift bits 1 through 4 on the punch controller PCB as follows Fig 3 130 2 Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the punch controller PCB A press will automatically adjust the sensor output The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the punch controller PCB are ON LED 1001 LED1002 LED1003 3 Shift all...

Page 393: ...llows Fig 3 131 2 Press SW1002 on the punch controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following repeatedly from top to bot tom 3 Press SW1003 on the punch controller PCB twice The presses will store the selected number of punch holes on the punch controller PCB A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash ...

Page 394: ...n Procedure 1 Turn off the host machine 2 Set bits 1 through 4 on the punch controller PCB as follows Fig 3 132 3 Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the punch controller PCB at the same time The presses will initialize the EEP ROM At the end all LEDs LED1001 LED1002 LED1003 will go ON 4 Adjust the sensor output and store the number of punch holes 1 2 3 4 ON ...

Page 395: ...he rear cover 2 Remove the right upper cover 3 and cut open the window for the key copy counter Fig 3 134 3 Pull out the harness connector from the hole of the machine frame and cut the short har ness of the connector Treat the cut harness properly to avoid it causing a short circuit with the machine frame Then disconnect the dummy connector Fig 3 135 Counter socket MU 10 Key copy counter MU 8 Rig...

Page 396: ...s connector of the equipment side 5 Install the counter socket to the machine frame with two screws 6 Reattach the cover Fig 3 136 7 Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark pointing the rear side of the equipment Fig 3 137 8 Enter the value 3 in the setting mode 08 202 Screw Counter socket Harness connector Key copy counter ...

Page 397: ...en the equipment was manufactured dogleg image should not occur However if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur the following adjustment must be performed An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the adjustment Fig 3 138 Fig 3 139 Fig 3 140 Normal Image Feeding Direction Feeding Direction Dogleg Image A Approx 48 mm of the trailing edge Dogleg Image B...

Page 398: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 102 Adjustment procedure 2 Remove the 2 adjustment screws 1 Check the position of the adjustment screws Fig 3 141 06 01 ...

Page 399: ... figure below so that the stay of the fuser unit can move downward Fig 3 143 4 Check the copied image If further adjust ment is needed fix the adjustment screws in the position as shown in the figure so that the stay can be moved both upward and down ward by 1 mm Be sure to make the scales on the right and left match when installing the adjustment screws Fig 3 144 Installation position of the adju...

Page 400: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 ADJUSTMENT June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 3 104 ...

Page 401: ...pages drive counts and replacement record and to do a counter clearing opera tion more efficiently when replacing The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode 9S 103 4 1 2 Operational flow and operational screen 1 Operational flow Fig 4 1 The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the CANCEL button is pressed after moving from the main scre...

Page 402: ...splaying of the standard number of output pages counts x 1 000 to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts x 1 000 is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the standard number of drive counts x 1 000 to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present number of output pages counts x 1 000 When the...

Page 403: ...f output pages counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts x 1 000 to replace the sub unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts x 1 000 is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the standard number of drive counts x 1 000 to replace the sub unit parts Disp...

Page 404: ... PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 4 4 3 Clear screen Fig 4 4 When the INITIALIZE button is pressed Present number of output pages counts and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated 1 1 ...

Page 405: ...oller CLEANING ROLLER Separation finger for fuser roller SEPARATION FINGER FUSER Upper drawer 1st CST Pickup roller PICK UP ROLLER 1st CST Feed roller FEED ROLLER 1st CST Separation roller SEP ROLLER 1st CST Lower drawer 2nd CST Pickup roller PICK UP ROLLER 2nd CST Feed roller FEED ROLLER 2nd CST Separation roller SEP ROLLER 2nd CST Bypass unit SFB Pickup roller PICK UP ROLLER SFB Feed roller FEED...

Page 406: ...on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of out put pages and the drive counts Example 1 When the number of output pages has reached the specified level Example 2 When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified level The parts in RADF The parts ...

Page 407: ...S 2 or list printing mode 9S 103 6S 2 6 START POWER ON 2 START 9S 103 9 START POWER ON 103 START Fig 4 5 Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment 2 Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations Refer to the Service Manual if necessary 3 Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished Then turn ON the power and make some copies to con...

Page 408: ...d from the start of use Whichever is earlier e STUDIO280 282 When the number of output pages has reached 270 000 or 2 5 years have passed from the start of use Whichever is earlier 1 Replace all the supplies 2 Check the components in the drive section gears pulleys timing belts etc Replace them with new ones if they are damaged 3 Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged o...

Page 409: ...an with alcohol Clean with soft pad cloth or vacuum cleaner L Launa 40 The number of sheets consumed before replacement Value x 1 000 Replace if deformed or damaged After cleaning or replacement confirm there is no problem User name Coating Serial No SI Silicon oil W1 White grease Molykote X5 6020 W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 AV Alvania No 2 FL Floil GE 334C CG Conductive grease KS 660 Inspecto...

Page 410: ...UDIO282 The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from each paper source Be careful not to put oil on the rollers belts and belt pulleys when lubricating A Scanner B Laser unit Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks A1 Original glass or A P22 I1 a1 A2 ADF original glass P22 I2 a1 A3 Mi...

Page 411: ...g bearing L c2 C8 One side of the plastic bushing W1 C9 Registration roller A Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks D1 Transport roller upper middle and lower A D2 One side of the GCB busing to which the shaft is inserted L D3 One side of the plastic busing to which the shaft is inserted W1 D4 Paper guide P32 I4 Items to check Cleanin...

Page 412: ...x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks G1 Charger case P26 I2 g1 G2 Transfer charger wire 64 74 90 P26 I18 g1 G3 Separation charger wire 64 74 90 P26 I18 g1 G4 Pre transfer guide or A G5 Post transfer guide or A G6 Separation supporter P26 I17 G7 Terminal cover G8 Contact point of termi nals G9 Transfer guide roller P26 I14 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 she...

Page 413: ...ay I8 Toner cartridge drive gear shaft W1 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks J1 Fuser roller 128 148 180 P30 I23 J2 Pressure roller 128 148 180 P30 I21 J3 Separation finger for fuser roller 128 148 180 P30 I28 j1 J4 Cleaning roller 128 148 180 P30 I14 J5 Fuser unit entrance guide A P30 I39 J6 Thermistor 3 pcs A P30 I10 j2 J7 Drive ...

Page 414: ... Read sensor L10 Read roller A L11 3rd small roller A L12 4th small roller A L13 Reverse sensor L14 Exit roller A L15 Reverse roller A L16 Platen sheet or A Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks M1 Pickup roller upper lower 80 P5 I29 M2 Feed roller upper lower 80 P5 I26 M3 Separation roller upper lower AV W2 80 P5 I12 m1 M4 Drive gear...

Page 415: ...sor Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks P1 OCT separator roller or A W1 FL P2 I22 p1 P2 Other rollers or A P2 I39 P3 Paper guide or A P4 OCT stuck sensor P1 I13 P5 OCT home position sensor P6 OCT feed sensor Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I Remarks Q1 Feed roller or A Q2 D...

Page 416: ... Replacement KS Operation check Parts list P I Remarks R1 Pickup roller A 120 5 1 R2 Separation roller A 120 4 10 R3 Feed roller A 120 5 1 R4 Registration roller A R5 Intermediatetransfer roller A R6 Front read roller A R7 Platen roller A R8 Rear read roller A R9 Reverse registration roller A R10 Exit reverse roller A R11 Platen sheet or A 05 11 ...

Page 417: ...32 280 282 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 4 17 4 Fig 4 6 Front side A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 C3 B1 D1 D1 D1 E3 E2 E4 E1 H2 I2 D4 H5 H1 G3 J4 H4 H6 I8 I1 J1 J2 J3 C2 J6 C3 C1 G6 C2 C9 K2 G2 G9 A10 C1 K1 H7 I4 F2 F4 F5 H3 G4 I7 G5 J5 C4 G1 C5 I5 I3 F1 ...

Page 418: ...NTENANCE PM June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 4 18 Fig 4 7 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF MR 3016 Fig 4 8 Paper Feed Pedestal PFP Fig 4 9 Large Capacity Feeder LCF L5 L4 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L2 L3 L1 M1 M2 M3 M3 M1 M2 N1 N2 N3 05 11 ...

Page 419: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 4 19 4 Fig 4 10 Job Separator JSP Fig 4 11 Offset Tray OCT O3 O6 O5 O2 O1 O2 O4 P3 P6 P5 P1 P2 P4 ...

Page 420: ...230 232 280 282 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 4 20 Fig 4 12 Finisher MJ 1025 Fig 4 13 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF MR 3020 Q5 Q4 Q7 Q8 Q2 Q1 Q6 Q8 Q3 R1 R3 R7 R8 R4 R2 R6 R5 R9 R10 R11 05 11 ...

Page 421: ...ng When replacing the separation roller apply adequate amount of white grease Molykote HP 300 on the places of the holder shown in the figure 4 places Note Note Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered c2 Drive gears in the paper feeding section teeth of gears and shafts Apply some white grease Molykote X5 6020 to the teeth of gears and sh...

Page 422: ...eplace the needle electrode with a new one if it is damaged regardless of the number of output pages which have been mode Note Note Do not touch the needle electrode with your bare hand when attaching the needle electrode g1 Transfer separation charger case and transfer separation wire Clean the transfer separation charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly and then wipe them w...

Page 423: ... to deform it Do not leave the lint on the tip 2 Apply patting powder to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning them to reduce the load on the drum surface by the finger h3 Recovery blade Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get damaged i1 Developer material After replacing the developer material be sure to perform t...

Page 424: ...off forcibly Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily j2 Thermistor Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is replaced Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning Replace the thermistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree o1 Idling roller Apply one rice grain amount of white grease ...

Page 425: ...371 CH M WIRE CH 060 353 R WIRE CH 060 353 R D 2320 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 FR KIT 2320 Fuser roller Pressure roller Separation finger for fuser roller Cleaning roller Ozone filter HR 2320 U HR 2320 L SCRAPER HR 371 B 2320 L ASYS FILTER OZN 1 1 6 1 1 ROLL KIT 2320CST Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller ROLLER PICK AT K ROLL FEED K ROLL SPT 1 1 1 ROL KIT 1010 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation ro...

Page 426: ...switch jig 101 1 Brush 101 2 Doctor sleeve jig 101 3 Developer material nozzle 101 4 Wire holder jig 101 5 Belt tension jig 101 6 High voltage transformer jig 101 7 Downloading jig DLM board 102 1 Download JIG 2 6 Flash ROMs 102 2 Download JIG 1 2 Flash ROMs 102 3 ROM writer adapter For 1881 102 4 ROM writer adapter For 1931 102 5 ...

Page 427: ...oil ASM SILICONE 1M 100cc Bottle 101 10 L Launa 40 OIL LAUNA40 100 100cc Oiler 101 11 W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 ASM PG HP300 S 100g Bottle 101 12A W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 GREASE HP300 S 10g Bottle 101 12B AV Alvania No 2 ASM PG ALV2 100g Tube 101 13 W1 White grease Molykote X5 6020 MOLYKOTE 100 100g Tube 101 14 FL Floil GE 334C ASM PG GE334C S 20g Bottle 101 15 ...

Page 428: ...red in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C no condensation Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes 3 Drum cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C and should also be protected against high humidity chemicals and or their fumes 4 Fuser roll...

Page 429: ...e to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade 3 Installation of the equipment and storage of drum Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature high humidity chemi cals and or their fumes Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such as near a window Otherwise the drum will fatigue and will not prod...

Page 430: ...lers and clean if necessary Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller Check the fuser roller for proper rotation 3 Cleaning procedure When fuser roller...

Page 431: ...ed 2 Check if the connector CN308 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the exit sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the registration roller clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 108 158 l l l l l l l...

Page 432: ...nnector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Replace the LGC board Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode Input check Registration area Transfer cover Registration sensor 03 FAX ON 2 A 1st transport sensor 03 FAX OFF 6 E Exit area Transfer cover...

Page 433: ...ode 03 FAX ON 2 A l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the registration sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YE...

Page 434: ... the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the 1st transport sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Are the lower middle transport clutches working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 203 205 l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connectors of the lower middle transpor...

Page 435: ...if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the registration sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the registration clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 108 158 l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected ...

Page 436: ... NO 1 Check if the connectors of the lower middle transport clutches are disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the lower middle transport clutches 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is th...

Page 437: ...FP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor 7 Replace the PFP board 8 Replace the LGC board YES Is the PFP transport clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 225 l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN241 CN242 and CN244 on the PFP...

Page 438: ... the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 5 Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the ADU exit sensor 7 Replace the ADU board 8 Replace the LGC board YES Is the ADU clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 222 l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is d...

Page 439: ...rm the output check in the test mode 03 121 171 l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the exit motor 6 Replace the ...

Page 440: ...es are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Replace the LGC board Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode Input check Registration area Transfer cover Registration sensor 03 FAX ON 2 A 1st transport sensor 03 FAX OFF 6 E Exit area Transfer cover Exit sensor 03 FAX ON 2 B ADU ADU ADU entran...

Page 441: ... circuited 6 Replace the JSP feed sensor 7 Replace the JSP board 8 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Replace the JSP board 2 Replace the LGC board E960 Jam not reaching the OCT feed sensor E961 Stop jam at the OCT feed sensor Open the OCT cover Is there any paper on the transport path YES Remove the paper NO Is the OCT feed sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 H l l l l l ...

Page 442: ...he bypass paper sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 1 D l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the bypass paper sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace ...

Page 443: ... the rollers Replace them if they are worn out In case the paper is fed from the lower drawer PFP or LCF Open the transfer cover Is there any paper in front of the 1st transport sensor YES Remove the paper NO Are the 1st 2nd transport sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 6 E 7 E l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the 1st 2nd transport sensor is disconnec...

Page 444: ...m the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 6 E l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the registration s...

Page 445: ... disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the 1st transport sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the ADU clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 222 l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC boar...

Page 446: ...ircuited or open circuited 5 Replace the 1st transport sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the bypass feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 204 Is the bypass paper sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 1 D l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass paper sensor are disconnected 2 Check if the connecto...

Page 447: ...ses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the 1st transport sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the upper drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 201 l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is discon nected 2 Check if the connector CN307 on the LGC b...

Page 448: ... are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the 2nd transport sensor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the lower drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 202 l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is discon nected 2 Check if the connector CN307 on the LGC boar...

Page 449: ...he conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor 7 Replace the PFP board 8 Replace the LGC board YES Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 226 l l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is dis connected 2 Check if any o...

Page 450: ...e conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor 7 Replace the PFP board 8 Replace the LGC board YES Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 228 l l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon nected 2 Check if any of...

Page 451: ...he conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the LCF feed sensor 7 Replace the LCF board 8 Replace the LGC board YES Is the LCF feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 209 l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN100 CN101 and CN103 on ...

Page 452: ... pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the front cover opening closing switch 6 Replace the LGC board YES Replace the LGC board Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 1 C l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the con...

Page 453: ...d and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the front cover opening closing switch 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 1 C l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector for 24 V power supply is disconnecte...

Page 454: ...e connector of the PFP side cover opening closing switch is disconnected 2 Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector CN310 on the LGC board is disconnected 4 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 5 Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open ci...

Page 455: ...onductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the ADU opening closing switch 7 Replace the ADU board 8 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Replace the ADU board 2 Replace the LGC board E440 Side cover opened during printing Is the side cover open YES Remove the paper if there is any then close the cover NO Is the side door switch working Perform the input...

Page 456: ...erns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the LCF side cover opening closing switch 7 Replace the LCF board 8 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Replace the LCF board 2 Replace the LGC board E480 Bridge unit opened during printing Is the bridge unit open YES Remove the paper if there is any then close the unit NO Is the bridge unit opening closing switch working ...

Page 457: ...circuited 6 Replace the JSP cover switch 7 Replace the JSP board 8 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Replace the JSP board 2 Replace the LGC board E491 OCT cover opened during printing Is the OCT cover open YES Remove the paper if there is any then close the cover NO Is the OCT cover switch working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 F l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector o...

Page 458: ...nsor Are the pickup roller feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out YES Clean the rollers or replace them NO Is the original excessively curled or folded YES Flatten and set it again NO Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 8 E 7 H l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connectors of the original length sensor and registration se...

Page 459: ...e RADF board is short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the empty sensor 7 Replace the RADF board YES Replace the RADF board E721 Jam not reaching the read sensor Are the registration roller and read roller stained YES Clean the rollers NO Is the read sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 G l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected 2 Check if ...

Page 460: ...cuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor 6 Replace the RADF board YES Replace the RADF board E724 Stop jam at the registration sensor Is the registration roller stained YES Clean the roller NO Is the registration sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 H l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the c...

Page 461: ...of the switching power supply are normal 6 Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited 7 Replace the RADF board 8 Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited 9 Replace the SLG board E725 Stop jam at the read sensor Is the read roller stained YES Clean the roller NO Is the read sensor working Perform the input check ...

Page 462: ...F board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the exit sensor 6 Replace the RADF board YES Replace the RADF board E741 Stop jam at the reverse sensor Are the read roller and reverse roller stained YES Clean the rollers NO Is the reverse sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 F l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the conn...

Page 463: ...n on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the reverse sensor 6 Replace the RADF board YES Replace the RADF board E743 Jam not reaching the exit sensor feeding in reverse Are the reverse roller and read roller stained YES Clean the rollers NO Is the exit sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 E l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the exit sensor is di...

Page 464: ... circuited 5 Replace the RADF jam access cover switch 6 Replace the RADF board YES Replace the RADF board E870 RADF open jam Is the RADF opened YES Remove the original if any and close the RADF NO Is the RADF opening closing sensor adjusted within the specified range NO Adjust the RADF opening closing sensor YES Is the RADF opening closing sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 D l l l...

Page 465: ...he connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected 4 Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited 5 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the bridge unit transport sensors 1 and 2 7 Replace the LGC board YES Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working Perform the output check 03 232 l l l l l l NO 1 Check if...

Page 466: ...s the connector J1006 on the punch controller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor PI1P open circuited YES Connect the connector securely Replace the harness NO Is the punch home position sensor working properly l NO 1 Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely 2 Replace the punch home position sensor YES...

Page 467: ...uator l l NO 1 Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely 2 Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place 3 Replace the inlet sensor YES Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment YES Remove the paper NO Is the connector CN16 inlet sensor on the finisher controller PC board disconnected Is the...

Page 468: ...O 1 Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely 2 Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place 3 Replace the inlet sensor YES Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher YES Remove the paper NO Is the connector CN16 inlet sensor on the finisher controller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting the ...

Page 469: ... Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment YES Remove the paper NO Is the connector CN16 inlet sensor folding position sensor on the finisher controller PC board disconnected Is the connector J1007 photosensor PC board on the punch controller PC board discon nected Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor inlet sensor fold ing po...

Page 470: ... finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Is the finisher connected with the equipment Are the upper cover and front door of the finisher closed l YES 1 Connect the finisher with the equipment 2 Close the cover and door of the finisher NO Is any of the connectors CN4 upper cover sensor and front door sensor and CN8 joint switch on the finisher controller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting...

Page 471: ...e the stapling home position sensor YES Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Is there any paper remaining on the stapling tray YES Remove the paper NO Open the front door Is the stapler home position mark blue YES Rotate the stapler opening dial until the home position mark turns blue NO Is any of the connectors CN11 slide home position sensor CN8 stapler safety switch and CN6 staple f...

Page 472: ... controller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor S2 open cir cuited YES Connect the connector securely Replace the harness NO Is the inlet sensor working properly Check the movement of the actuator l l NO 1 Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely 2 Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place 3 Replace the inlet s...

Page 473: ... on the stapling tray YES Remove the paper NO Are the paper on the stack tray and the latches of the stack delivery belt contacting each other YES Remove the paper on the stack tray NO Is any of the connectors CN5 delivery belt home position sensor CN13 delivery motor on the finisher controller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery belt home ...

Page 474: ...ntroller PC board disconnected Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position sensor S3 open circuited YES Connect the connector securely Replace the harness NO Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly l l NO 1 Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor securely 2 Replace the returning roller home position ...

Page 475: ...t the connector securely Replace the harness NO Is the folding position sensor working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Replace the finisher controller PC board EAC0 Saddle transport delay jam MJ 1025 Is there any paper remaining on the paper transport path in the saddle stitcher section in the finisher YES Remove the paper NO Is the connector CN16 folding position sensor on the finisher control...

Page 476: ...ide is open circuited 4 Check if the harness connecting the I F connector of the finisher side and finisher con troller PC board is open circuited 5 Replace the finisher controller PC board EB30 Ready time time out jam Is there paper in the equipment NO Replace the LGC board YES Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other NO Connect them properly YES Is the harness securely co...

Page 477: ...ck if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the main motor 6 Replace the LGC board YES Is the LED on the main motor board lit without flickering l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 2 Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short cir...

Page 478: ... board is disconnected 7 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 8 Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 9 Replace the PFP motor 10 Replace the PFP board 11 Replace the LGC board YES Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flickering l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connect...

Page 479: ...ctor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the LGC board YES Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 6 H 7 H l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN307 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check if the slit reaches the sensor 4 Check if the connector pins are disc...

Page 480: ... board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the PFP board 7 Replace the LGC board YES Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 2 H 4 H l l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN241 CN247 and CN248 on the PFP board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector CN310 on the LGC b...

Page 481: ...uited 6 Replace the LCF board 7 Replace the LGC board YES Are the LCF tray bottom sensor and LCF tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 5 F 3 A l l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN100 CN104 and CN105 on the LCF board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector CN310 on the LGC board...

Page 482: ... or open circuited 6 Replace the LCF board 7 Replace the LGC board YES Are the LCF end fence home stop position sensors working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 5 A 5 B l l l l l l l l l l l NO 1 Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected 2 Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is disconnected 3 Check if the connector CN310 on the LGC boa...

Page 483: ...sconnected 6 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 7 Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 8 Replace the LCF transport motor 9 Replace the LCF board 10 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 2 Che...

Page 484: ...k if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the lens unit 6 Replace the SLG board NO 1 Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected 2 Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN9 is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or ope...

Page 485: ... circuited or open circuited 3 Replace the SLG board NO 1 Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open cir cuited 2 Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited 3 Replace the SLG board C280 Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position l l l YES The carriage home position sensor is not turne...

Page 486: ... are disconnected 2 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 3 Replace the LGC board 4 Clear the status counter After repairing the matter which caused the error C410 perform the following 1 Turn ON the power while 0 and 8 are pressed simultaneously 2 Key in 400 then press START 3 Change the current status counter value 1 or 2 to 0 then press ENTER or IN...

Page 487: ...come ready 7 The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 230 C or higher 9 The temperature detected by the side thermistor is 230 C or higher 9 The temperature detected by the edge thermistor is 230 C or higher 9 only during printing C450 Thermistor abnormality during printing 1 Check the edge thermistor 1 Check if the connector is disconnected 2 Check if the edge thermistor is in contact...

Page 488: ...sher is attached 2 Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is discon nected or open circuited 3 Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open cir cuited 5 Replace the IPC board 6 Replace the finisher controller PC board F0...

Page 489: ...e operation 5 Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board mainly Q12 and Q16 for short circuits and open circuits 6 Replace the fan motor 7 Replace the RADF board C820 Read sensor adjustment error 1 Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty 2 Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF boa...

Page 490: ...ircuited and the connector pin is dis connected 3 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 4 Replace the laser optical unit 5 Replace the LGC board YES 1 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 2 Replace the LGC board CA20 H Sync detection error Are the harness open circuited and the connectors disconnected be...

Page 491: ...sensor PI12 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and feed motor M1 correct NO Correct the wiring YES Try turning the stack feed roller upper shaft by hand Does the stack feed roller upper move up down normally NO Fix the mechanism YES Try replacing the feed motor M1 Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the finisher controller PC b...

Page 492: ...k sensor S1 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES 1 Replace the delivery motor M1 2 Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Is the delivery belt home position sensor PI7 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor M3 correct NO Correct the wiring YES Rotate the stack delivery roller by hand Does it rotate smooth...

Page 493: ... as soon as the tray is driven NO Replace the finisher controller PC board YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and shift motor M6 correct YES Replace the shift motor NO Correct the wiring Procedure 2 Is the tray as far as the shift upper limit sensor YES Lower the position of the tray NO Is the shift upper limit sensor PI15 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the w...

Page 494: ... Fix the lift mechanism NO Replace the shift motor Is the shift motor clock sensor PI7 working properly YES Replace the finisher controller PC boar NO Replace the sensor CB50 Staple motor abnormality MJ 1025 Procedure 1 Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the staple fold motor normal NO Correct the wiring YES Try to rotate the staple jam releasing dial Is there mechanical tr...

Page 495: ...mechanism YES Try replacing the staple fold motor M7 Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the finisher controller PC board Procedure 3 Is the folding home position sensor PI11 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the staple fold motor normal NO Correct the wiring YES Try to rotate the fold jam releasing dial Is there mechanica...

Page 496: ...y replacing the staple fold motor M7 Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the finisher controller PC board CB60 Stapler unit shift motor abnormality MJ 1025 Is the slide home position sensor PI18 working properly NO Replace the sensor controller PC board YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and slide motor correct NO Correct the wiring YES Is there any mechanical probl...

Page 497: ...of the drive belt normal NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension YES Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down NO Apply grease on the cut out part of the front side frame where the bush ing contacts YES Is the spring of the returning roller detached YES Attach the spring NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack deliver...

Page 498: ...nsor S3 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES 1 Replace the stack delivery motor 2 Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Paddle motor abnormality Is the paddle home position sensor PI2 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the swing guide home position sensor PI3 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and paddle mot...

Page 499: ...e the horizontal registration motor M2P Try replacing the punch controller PC board Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the finisher controller PC board CC60 Punch motor abnormality MJ 1025 Is the punch home position sensor PI1P working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the punch motor clock sensor PI3P working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher contr...

Page 500: ... YES Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll YES Fix it NO 1 Replace the front jogging motor 2 Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Alignment motor front abnormality Is the aligning plate home position sensor front PI4 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and alignment motor front M4 cor rect NO Correct the wiring YES I...

Page 501: ...s the stack tray paper height sensor S10 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor S25 upper stack tray full sensor S22 and stack processing safety switch S26 working properly NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board YES Does the voltage between the pins J14 1 pin and 2 pin on the finisher controller PC board become 24 V when the upper stack ...

Page 502: ...NO Replace the sensor YES Is the stack tray paper height sensor S10 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor S13 and lower stack tray full sensor S23 work ing properly NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board YES Does the voltage between the pins J3 1 pin and 2 pin on the finisher controller PC board become 24 V when the lower stack tray lif...

Page 503: ... the rack run over the stopper of the roll YES Fix it NO 1 Replace the rear jogging motor 2 Replace the finisher controller PC board MJ 1025 Alignment motor rear abnormality Is the aligning plate home position sensor rear PI5 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and aligning plate home position sen sor rear correct NO Correct the wiring ...

Page 504: ... CN14 5 and CN14 3 on the finisher controller PC board become 24 V YES Replace the punch controller PC board NO Replace the finisher controller PC board CDD0 Folding sensor abnormality MJ 1025 Is the folding position sensor PI10 working properly NO Replace the sensor YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and folding position sensor PI10 cor rect NO Correct the wiring YES Is th...

Page 505: ...wise by hand Is there mechanical trapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up down movement of the swing guide YES Fix the mechanism NO 1 Replace the paddle motor M2 2 Replace the finisher controller PC board CE00 Communication error between finisher and puncher unit MJ 1025 Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON YES End NO Is the wiring between the finisher con...

Page 506: ...e OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open cir cuited 5 Replace the OCT motor 6 Replace the OCT board 7 Replace the LGC board CF60 Recycle toner transport area lock 1 Check if any foreign matter or toner flakes are on the recycle toner transport area 2 Check if the auger or the gear is damaged on the recycle toner transport area 3 Check if the connector CN305 is disconnected or the conne...

Page 507: ...orm the panel calibration 08 692 Note Note When the NVRAM is initialized the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also initialized Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization 4 Turn the power OFF and then back ON If the error is not recovered replace the NVRAM on the SYS board F100 HDD Initialization error 1 Check if the HDD is mounted 2 Check if the specified HDD is mounted 3 Che...

Page 508: ... Filing using the Setting Mode 08 666 F108 SHA partition damage Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode 08 667 F120 Database abnormality 1 Rebuild the databases Perform 08 684 2 If the error is not recovered initialize the HDD Key in 2 at 08 690 F130 Invalid MAC address e STUDIO202L 232 282 Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08 995 If they are differe...

Page 509: ...32 File deletion failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs first check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting 08 690 1C11 Insufficient memory When there are running jobs perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perfor...

Page 510: ... Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again 1C62 Memory acquiring failure Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Replace the main memory and perform the job again 1C63 Terminal IP address unset Reset the Terminal IP address Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job i...

Page 511: ...n mail address Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address then perform the job again 1C70 SMTP client OFF Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again 1C71 SMTP authentication ERROR Check that SMTP authentication method login name and password are correct then perform authenti cation again 1C72 POP Before SMTP ERROR Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting a...

Page 512: ...er is operating properly Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again 2503 Destination mail address error RFC 503 2504 HOST NAME error RFC 504 2551 Destination mail address error RFC 551 Check if the mail server is operating properly Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs replace the NIC board 2550 Destination mail address...

Page 513: ...er running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode 08 666 2B31 Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created deleted Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists If no this error would not occur Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder Perform the job in error again If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be...

Page 514: ... using the Setting Mode 08 666 2BB1 Power failure 2BD0 Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable 2BE0 Machine parameter reading error Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again 2BF0 Exceeding maximum number of pages Reduce the number of insert...

Page 515: ... Invalid parameter When a template is used form the template again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again 2C15 Exceeding file capacity Reset and extend the Message size limitation or reduce the number of pages and perform the job again 2C20 System management module access abnormality 2C21 Job control module access abnormality 2C22 Job control module...

Page 516: ...ess unset Reset the SMTP address and perform the job Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again 2C66 Server time time out error Check if the SMTP server is operating properly 2C67 NIC time time out error 2C68 NIC access error 2C6D System error Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs replace the NIC board 2C69 SMTP server ...

Page 517: ...ROR Check that SMTP authentication method login name and password are correct then perform authenti cation again 2C72 POP Before SMTP ERROR Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct then perform authentica tion again 2C80 E mail transmission failure when processing E mail job received Reset the Received InternetFax Forward 2C81 Process failure of FAX job received Res...

Page 518: ...on error 2D13 Message transmission error Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again 2D14 2D61 Invalid parameter When a template is used form the template again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again 2D15 Exceeding document number Delete some documents in the folder and then perform the job in error again 2D20 System managemen...

Page 519: ...urn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again 2D64 Login failure Reset the login name and password Perform the job Check if the account of the server is properly set up 2D65 Exceeding documents in folder Creating new document is failed Delete some documents in the folder 2D66 HDD full failure during processing Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again ...

Page 520: ... in RFC2046 format 3A50 3A51 3A52 Insufficient HDD capacity error 3A60 3A61 3A62 Warning of insufficient HDD capacity These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs etc Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time or divide the mail into more than one Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for n...

Page 521: ...t the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size 3C50 3C51 3C52 Offramp destination error These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail 3C60 3C61 3C62 Offramp security error These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the ...

Page 522: ... Install the print kit and perform the job again Register it officially and perform the job again 4031 HDD full failure during printing Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity 4032 Private print only error Select Private and then perform the printing again 4033 Printing data storing limitatio...

Page 523: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 93 5 A290 Limit over error A291 Limit over error A292 Limit over error Clear the limit counter 05 11 ...

Page 524: ...heck test print image 04 113 Go to step 4 if there is any problem on image Scanner 3 Are the original glass mirrors and lens dirty Clean them Printed image 4 Is the image faded Perform troubleshooting for faded image 5 Is background fogging occurring Perform troubleshooting for back ground fogging 6 Is there a blotch on the image Perform troubleshooting for blotched image 7 Is the image transferre...

Page 525: ...former Main charger Developer bias 7 Is the high voltage transformer out put defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer Developer unit 8 Is the contact between the drum and developer material normal Adjust the doctor sleeve gap and polarity Developer material Toner Drum 9 Using the specified developer mate rial toner and drum Use the specified developer material toner and drum 10 Have ...

Page 526: ...4 113 When defects occur perform the cor responding troubleshooting proce dure Defective area Step Check items Prescription Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image density Adjust the density Parameter adjustment value 2 Check the image processing param eters Check the adjustment value for sharpness Printer section 3 Check test print image 04 113 When defects occur perform the co...

Page 527: ...r roller 5 Has the fuser roller reached its PM life Replace the fuser roller 6 Is the setting temperature of the fuser roller normal Check the adjustment values of fuser roller temperature 08 407 410 411 450 515 516 Paper 7 Has the appropriate paper type been selected Select a proper mode 8 Is the setting temperature of the fuser roller in each paper type normal Check the setting and correct it 08...

Page 528: ...toring paper in damp place Bedewed scanner 2 Is the scanner bedewed Clean the scanner Drum 3 Is the drum surface wet or dirty Wipe the drum with a piece of dry cloth Do not use alcohol or other organic solvents Ozone exhaust 4 Is the exhaust fan operating prop erly Check the connection of connector Replace the ozone exhaust fan 5 Is the ozone filter stained or dam aged Replace the ozone filter Fee...

Page 529: ...Is the temperature of the fuser roller normal Check the setting and correct it 08 407 410 411 450 515 516 Developer material Toner 5 Using the specified developer mate rial and toner Use the specified developer material and toner Paper 6 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF damp Avoid storing paper in damp place 7 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode Use the proper type of paper or select the ...

Page 530: ...Developer unit 4 Is the developer unit installed prop erly Check and correct the engaging con dition of the developer unit gears 5 Do the developer sleeve and mixers rotate Check and fix the drive system of the developer unit 6 Is the developer material smoothly transported Remove the foreign matter from the developer material 7 Has the magnetic brush phase been shifted Adjust the developer polari...

Page 531: ...h the day and night For the model with damp heater Main charger 4 Is the main charger securely installed Install it securely 5 Is the needle electrode broken Replace the needle electrode High voltage transformer Main charger 6 Is the high voltage transformer out put defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer 7 Are the connectors of the high volt age harness securely connected Is the ha...

Page 532: ... foreign matter or dew on the drum seal Remove the foreign matter or dew 6 Is the upper drum seal of the devel oper unit in contact with the drum Correct the position of the drum seal or replace it Drum 7 Is there a foreign matter on the drum surface Replace the drum Transport path 8 Does the toner image contact with any foreign matter before the paper enters the fusing section after the separatio...

Page 533: ...scharge LED or check the harness and the circuit Developer unit 5 Is the developer sleeve rotating nor mally Is there any abnormality on the sleeve surface Check the drive system of the devel oper unit or clean the sleeve sur face Drive system 6 Are the drum and scanner jittering Check each drive system High voltage transformer Main charger Developer bias Transfer charger 7 Is the high voltage tra...

Page 534: ...nd set it again 4 Are the side guides of the drawer or LCF properly installed Adjust the position of the side guides Feed roller 5 Is the surface of the feed roller dirty Clean the feed roller surface with alcohol or replace the roller Rollers 6 Are the roller and shaft secured Check and tighten the E rings pins clips and setscrews Registration roller 7 Is the spring detached from the regis tratio...

Page 535: ...eedle electrode dirty or deformed Clean or replace the needle elec trode 7 Is there a foreign matter inside the main charger case Remove the foreign matter 8 Is the inside of the main charger case dirty Clean the inside of the main charger case Cleaner 9 Is there paper dust sticking to the drum cleaning blade edge Clean or replace the cleaning blade 10 Is the drum cleaning blade working properly C...

Page 536: ...sure roller fuser roller and separation fin ger for fuser roller reached their PM life Replace them High voltage transformer Main charger Developer bias Transfer charger 4 Is the high voltage transformer out put defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer Drum 5 Is there a deep scratch on the drum surface Replace the drum if the scratch has reached the aluminum base 6 Is there thin scra...

Page 537: ...ir PM life Replace the developer material and drum 5 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35 c or less without dew Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment with specification 6 Is there any dent on the drum sur face Replace the drum 7 Is there any film forming on the drum Clean or replace the drum Main charger 8 Is there any foreign matter on the charger Remove it 9 Is the ne...

Page 538: ...the recommended paper Use the recommended paper Transfer charger 5 Is the transfer charger case dirty Clean the transfer charger case 6 Is the transfer charger wire dirty Clean the transfer charger wire Registration roller 7 Is there any abnormality related to the registration roller or with the roller itself Clean the roller if it is dirty Securely attach the springs if they are detached Replace ...

Page 539: ...tain Discharge LED 5 Are the connectors of discharge LED harness securely connected Reconnect the harness securely 6 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean the discharge LED 7 Is any of the discharge LEDs off Replace the discharge LED Developer unit 8 Is the magnetic brush in proper con tact with the drum Adjust the doctor sleeve gap 9 Is the developer sleeve pressuriza tion mechanism working Check the ...

Page 540: ...on tact with the drum Check the installation of the devel oper unit Adjust the doctor sleeve gap and polarity 8 Is the developer sleeve pressuriza tion mechanism working Check the mechanism Main charger 9 Is the main charger dirty Clean it or replace the needle elec trode and main charger grid Drum 10 Is film forming occurring on the drum surface Clean or replace the drum 11 Has the drum reached i...

Page 541: ...r in the Adjustment Mode Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty or the spring detached Clean the registration roller with alco hol Securely attach the springs 3 Is the registration roller working prop erly Adjust or replace the gears if they are not engaged properly Feed clutch 4 Is the feed clutch working properly Check the circuit or feed clutch and replace them if necessary Pre ...

Page 542: ...ler rotating normally Check the fuser roller area Replace the rollers if necessary Drum 4 Is there a big scratch on the drum Replace the drum Operation of carriage 5 Is there any problem with the slide sheet Replace the slide sheet 6 Is there any problem with the car riage foot Replace the carriage foot 7 Is the tension of the timing belt nor mal Adjust the tension 8 Is there any problem with the ...

Page 543: ...er recovery auger 4 Is the toner recovered normally Clean the toner recovery auger Check the pressure of the cleaning blade Fuser unit 5 Is the cleaning roller damaged or has it reached its PM life Replace the cleaning roller 6 Are there bubble like scratches on the fuser roller 94 mm pitch on the image Replace the fuser roller Check and adjust the temperature control circuit 7 Has the fuser rolle...

Page 544: ... main charger case dirty Clean or replace them Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean the discharge LED 4 Is any of the discharge LEDs off Replace the discharge LED Scanner 5 Are the reflector exposure lamp mir rors lens and original glass espe cially the position of shading correction plate dirty Clean them Exposure lamp 6 Is the exposure lamp tilted Adjust the position of the exposure ...

Page 545: ...o dry Change the paper Separation 3 Is the output from the separation charger too high Adjust the output from the separa tion charger Transfer 4 Is the transfer charger case dirty Clean the transfer charger case 5 Is the transfer charger wire dirty Clean the transfer charger wire High voltage transformer Transfer charger 6 Is the output from the high voltage transformer normal Adjust the output Re...

Page 546: ...chive them in the e Filing of TopAccess 2 F code information Template registration information Address book Back them up in the Administrator menu of TopAccess 3 Department management data Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess 4 Log data Print Scan FAX Transmission Reception Export them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess Import cannot be performed 5 Data in the shared folder Scanned d...

Page 547: ...EAR button turn the power ON When Firmware Version Up Mode appears on the LCD key in 3 and press the START but ton 2 Format the HDD Setting Mode 08 690 2 3 Update with the download jig or USB storage See P 6 1 6 FIRMWARE UPDATING for details 4 Format the HDD Setting Mode 08 690 2 When the FAX unit GD 1150 is installed Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode 1 Perform the 1 100 FAX Set Up 1 102 Clearin...

Page 548: ...Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items having the different setting values Set the value which was set before the formatting 4 Turn the power OFF H Referring to the FUNCTION list which was printed beforehand perform the re setting of the default setting of the FAX function 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button 2 Press the ADMIN button enter the ...

Page 549: ...F090 error occurs when starting up Notes When SRAM is cleared following items need to be re set so make sure the contents of set tings are kept as a record FAX settings Terminal ID Default setting of fax E mail settings Setting of properties for E mail message Internet Fax Setting of properties for Internet Fax When SRAM is cleared the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function ...

Page 550: ...m 1 102 Clearing the image data Note Note Following image data are deleted when 1 102 is performed Images of fax polling transmission Images of fax Mailbox and box information Images of fax transmission Images of fax reception 14 Turn the power OFF 15 Turn the power ON 16 Set the dial type USER FUNCTIONS ADMIN FAX INITIAL SETUP ...

Page 551: ...SYS board Before the SYS board is disposed the following codes can be performed 08 1427 Forcible NVRAM data all clearing 08 1428 Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing Caution If these codes are performed the equipment cannot be started up 5 3 4 HDD information display This code displays the HDD operation history which is recorded in the HDD on the control panel HDD failure can be diagnosed or pre...

Page 552: ...05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence There will be a possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD HDD replacement is recommended c5 1 or more 05 Either one is at least 1000 High possibility of physical failure HDD replacement is recommended c5 05 All values are dis played as High possibility of physical failure A HDD connector harness or SYS board may be one o...

Page 553: ... Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries 0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive has been turned on c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency unloads c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of load unloads c2 Temperature This attribute is a me...

Page 554: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 TROUBLESHOOTING June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 5 124 ...

Page 555: ...ervice parts For updating only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board logic PC board and scanning section control PC board No firmware is installed on the NIC board and FAX board The latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and finisher control PC board When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field confirm t...

Page 556: ...quipment is available except the hard disk and the option Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig P 6 4 6 1 1 PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB P 6 11 6 1 2 PWA DWNLD 350 JIG1 16 MB P 6 21 6 1 4 K PWA DLM 320 Firmware Stored Download jig Individual update Batch update Master data Hard disk PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB System ROM System control PC board SYS board PWA DWNLD 350 JI...

Page 557: ...owing to write the data P 6 20 6 1 3 Writing the data to the download jig PWA DWNLD 350 JIG Fig 6 3 Jig board K PWA DLM 320 Important Pay attention to the direction of the ROM Fig 6 1 Jig board PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB Fig 6 2 Jig board PWA DWNLD 350 JIG1 16 MB Download jig ROM capacity Application PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB 8 MB x 6 Updating the master data PWA DWNLD 350 JIG1 16 MB 8 MB x 2 Updatin...

Page 558: ...Web data filing box control data UI data fixed section data common section data the language 1 to 7 data the language 1 to 6 data for Web A Update procedure Important Use the download jig PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig Do not turn OFF the power during the update The data could be damaged and not be oper ated properly 1 Write the data to ...

Page 559: ...30 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 5 6 4 Connect the download jig with the jig connector CN100 on the SYS board Fig 6 5 5 Turn ON the power Downloading starts automatically and the processing status is displayed on LCD screen Fig 6 6 Connector ...

Page 560: ...ot com pleted properly Turn OFF the power and then check the following items After confirming and clearing the problems restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the updating data written to the download jig properly Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly Fig 6 8 7 Turn OFF the power and then remove the download jig 8 Perform the Updating System ...

Page 561: ...anguage 1 in HDD 08 925 Version of UI data language 2 in HDD 08 926 Version of UI data language 3 in HDD 08 927 Version of UI data language 4 in HDD 08 928 Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08 929 Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08 931 Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08 930 Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON 08 933 HDD unit data version 08 934 Version of Web UI data lang...

Page 562: ...RMWARE UPDATING June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 6 8 C Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update The device check starts When the device check completes copying the data to HDD starts ...

Page 563: ...EC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 9 6 When copying all the files completes the backup of the RIP font starts When the backup of the RIP font completes the update completes with the following screen ...

Page 564: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 6 10 If an error occurs the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted ...

Page 565: ...e data FROM internal program data OS data FROM basic section software UI data fixed section data common section data UI data in FROM displayed at power ON Updating Engine ROM Engine ROM data Updating Scanner ROM Scanner ROM data Updating NIC ROM NIC ROM data A Update procedure Important Use the download jig PWA DWNLD 350 JIG1 16 MB PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB is substitutable Turn OFF the power befor...

Page 566: ...ig with the jig connector CN100 on the SYS board Fig 6 10 5 Turn ON the power while 8 button and 9 button are pressed simultaneously The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed is displayed next to the items to be updated All items are selected in the default settings Fig 6 11 Connector ...

Page 567: ...pment in a batch Select items as follows to update it individually Updating System ROM Select 1 OS Update 2 UI Update and 3 System Firmware Updating Engine ROM Select 6 Machine Firmware Update only Updating Scanner ROM Select 5 Scanner Firmware Update only Updating NIC ROM Select 4 NIC Firmware Update only Example Updating the system ROM Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and explained...

Page 568: ...pdate Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com pleted properly Turn OFF the power and then check the following items After confirming and clearing the problems restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the updating data written to the download jig properly Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly Fig 6 15 ...

Page 569: ... HDD may be destroyed NIC Error Message Error Contents Prescription NIC UPDATE FAILED 1 NIC initialization time out The IP address may not be assigned cor rectly Is the IP address assigned correctly Does the IP address conflict with the other system If the error still occurs replace the NIC board because it may be destroyed NIC UPDATE FAILED 2 ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be d...

Page 570: ...tton B Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed check each data version in the Setting Mode 08 to confirm that the data was overwritten properly Updating System ROM 08 900 System ROM version 08 920 FROM basic section software version 08 921 FROM internal program version 08 922 UI data fixed section version 08 923 UI data common section version 08 930 Version of UI data in F...

Page 571: ...rocessing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update As an example the display for updating the system ROM is explained below Press START button after selecting the item to be updated The device check starts When the device check completes erasing the data in the ROM of the equipment starts ...

Page 572: ...004 TOSHIBA TEC 6 18 When erasing the data completes copying the data to the ROM of the equipment starts When copying the data completes verifying the data starts When verifying the data completes copying and verifying the other data are implemented repeatedly ...

Page 573: ...L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 19 6 When copying and verifying all the data com plete the update completes with the following screen If an error occurs the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted ...

Page 574: ...e according to the ROM writer to be used Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model name indicated on the board Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used before connecting them If an unapplied adapter is connected the application of the ROM writer judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented Applicable combinations ...

Page 575: ...l although the ROM version is different 6 1 4 K PWA DLM 320 The firmware of the equipment engine ROM scanner ROM and the option RADF ROM Finisher ROM FAX ROM can be updated individually by using K PWA DLM 320 Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows Updating Engine ROM Engine ROM...

Page 576: ... power before installing or removing the download jig Do not turn OFF the power during the update The data could be damaged and not be oper ated properly Updating Engine ROM 1 Install the ROM to the download jig Make sure the direction is correct P 6 3 Fig 6 3 2 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 3 Take off the connector cover Fig 6 20 4 Remove the cover plate Fig 6 21 Connector cover Cover plate...

Page 577: ...ED starts blinking in approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed In this case turn OFF the power and check the following items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly Is the updating data writte...

Page 578: ... 24 Updating Scanner ROM 1 Install the ROM to the download jig Make sure the direction is correct P 6 3 Fig 6 3 2 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 3 Take off the right upper cover 1 Fig 6 23 4 Take off the right upper cover 2 Fig 6 24 Right upper cover 1 Right upper cover 2 ...

Page 579: ... The LED starts blink ing in approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed In this case turn OFF the power and check the fol lowing items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly Is the updating dat...

Page 580: ...ig lights 6 After the update is completed properly the LED on the download jig blinks The LED starts blink ing in approx 15 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed In this case turn OFF the power and check the fol lowing items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig con...

Page 581: ...ke sure the direction is correct P 6 3 Fig 6 3 2 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 3 Take off the finisher rear cover Fig 6 29 Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover 4 Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board Fig 6 30 Finisher rear cover Connector ...

Page 582: ...LED on the download jig blinks slowly The LED starts blinking in approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed or LED flashes fast In this case turn OFF the power and check the following items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM ins...

Page 583: ... Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment Turning OFF the power may clear the data below Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data Print the Mailbox Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data Press the JOB STATUS button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no memory transmission data 1 Install...

Page 584: ...X Set up Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode 08 08 201 Destination setting of the equipment 08 701 Destination setting of the FAX machine Turn ON the power while 1 button and button are pressed simultaneously Key in 100 Press the START button Notes If the equipment does not work properly after the operation 8 follow the procedure below and then perform the Clearing the i...

Page 585: ... update of the firmware of the equipment is available except the hard disk and the option Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig P 6 33 6 2 1 PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB P 6 42 6 2 2 Writing the data to the download jig PWA DWNLD 350 JIG Firmware Stored Download jig Batch update Individual update System ROM System control PC board SYS board PWA DWNLD 350 JIG2 48 MB En...

Page 586: ...fore ROM writer adapter PWA DL ADP 350 is required to write the data to these Flash ROMs Refer to the following to write the data P 6 42 6 2 2 Writing the data to the download jig PWA DWNLD 350 JIG K PWA DLM 320 Fig 6 35 Jig board K PWA DLM 320 Important Pay attention to the direction of the ROM ROM4 ROM5 ROM6 ROM1 ROM2 ROM3 Connector for SYS board connection Connector for ROM writer adapter conne...

Page 587: ...follows Updating System ROM System firmware System firmware data FROM internal program data OS data FROM basic section software UI data fixed section data common section data UI data in FROM displayed at power ON Updating Engine ROM Engine ROM data Updating Scanner ROM Scanner ROM data A Update procedure Important Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig Do not turn OFF t...

Page 588: ...jig with the jig connector CN100 on the SYS board Fig 6 37 5 Turn ON the power while 8 button and 9 button are pressed simultaneously The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed is displayed next to the items to be updated All items are selected in the default settings Connector 05 11 ...

Page 589: ...default settings Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch Select items as follows to update it individually Updating System ROM Select 0 OS Update 1 UI Update and 2 System Firmware Updating Engine ROM Select 3 Engine Firmware Update only Updating Scanner ROM Select 4 Scanner Firmware Update only Example Updating the system ROM Updating all the items is taken as an exampl...

Page 590: ... is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com pleted properly Status display during update Status display when update is completed OS Update OS Update Completed UI Data Update UI Data Update Completed SysFirm Update SysFirm Update Completed Engine MAIN Update Flash Update Engine MAIN Update Completed Scanner Firm Update Flash Update Scanner Firm Update Completed 05 11 ...

Page 591: ... jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover 10 Perform the initialization of the updating data Turn ON the power while 0 button and 8 button are pressed simultaneously Key in 947 and then press the START button Press the INITIALIZE button B Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed check each data version in the Setting Mode 08 to confirm that the data was overw...

Page 592: ...be different from the actual one because a parallel update is performed in the process Select items to be updated and press the START button to start updating the System ROM Engine ROM and Scanner ROM in parallel Item Selection Screen for Update 0 OS Update 1 UI Data Update 2 System Firmware Update System ROM Update Completed Engine ROM 4 Scanner Firmware Update Scanner ROM 3 Engine Firmware Updat...

Page 593: ...ATING 6 39 6 When the System ROM OS Update has been updated OS Update Completed is displayed and the UI Update update will start When the System ROM UI Update has been updated UI Data Update Completed is dis played and the System Firmware Update update will start 05 11 ...

Page 594: ...Flash Update is changed to Engine MAIN Update Com pleted When the System ROM System Firmware Update has been updated SysFirm Update Completed is displayed When the Scanner ROM has been updated Scanner Firm Update Flash Update is changed to Scanner Firm Update Com pleted When all data has been updated Update Completed is displayed 05 11 ...

Page 595: ...L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 41 6 Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display Failed items Error message 05 11 ...

Page 596: ...riter to be used Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model name indicated on the board Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used before connecting them If an unapplied adapter is connected the application of the ROM writer judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented Applicable combinations of the ROM writer and ad...

Page 597: ...OM in which the data will be written on the download jig is selected by switching the rotary switch on the adapter Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the data file to be written Note Note Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM version is different RotarySwitch File Name Flash ROM 1 firmImage 0 bin ROM1 2 firmImag...

Page 598: ... replacing the board The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows Updating Engine ROM Engine ROM data Updating Scanner ROM Scanner ROM data Updating RADF ROM RADF ROM data Updating Finisher ROM Finisher ROM data Updating FAX ROM FAX ROM data A Update Procedure Since the procedure differs depending on the data see the each procedure below Important Turn OFF the power before installing o...

Page 599: ...DATING 6 45 6 Updating Engine ROM 1 Install the ROM to the download jig Make sure the direction is correct P 6 32 Fig 6 35 2 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 3 Take off the connector cover Fig 6 41 4 Remove the cover plate Fig 6 42 Connector cover Cover plate 05 11 ...

Page 600: ...tarts blinking in approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed In this case turn OFF the power and check the following items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly Is the updating data written on...

Page 601: ... Updating Scanner ROM 1 Install the ROM to the download jig Make sure the direction is correct P 6 32 Fig 6 35 2 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 3 Take off the right upper cover 1 Fig 6 44 4 Take off the right upper cover 2 Fig 6 45 Right upper cover 1 Right upper cover 2 05 11 ...

Page 602: ... LED starts blink ing in approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed In this case turn OFF the power and check the fol lowing items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly Is the updating data wr...

Page 603: ...tically and the LED on the download jig lights 6 When the data rewriting is completed the LED blinks slowly at an interval of 0 8 sec If the LED blinks fast at an interval of 0 1 sec the rewriting has been failed In this case turn OFF the power and check the following items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to...

Page 604: ...er of the equipment 3 Take off the finisher rear cover Fig 6 49 Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover 4 Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board Fig 6 50 5 Change the setting of he DIP switch on the finisher control PC board Change all the setting of the DIP switch 1 8 to OFF Finisher rear cover Connec...

Page 605: ... approx 20 sec since the update starts It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min has passed or LED flashes fast In this case turn OFF the power and check the following items Then clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning Is the download jig connected properly Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly Is the updating data written...

Page 606: ...irm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment Turning OFF the power may clear the data below Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data Print the Mailbox Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data Press the JOB STATUS button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no memory transmission data 1 Install the ...

Page 607: ...Set up Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode 08 08 201 Destination setting of the equipment 08 701 Destination setting of the FAX machine Turn ON the power while 1 button and button are pressed simultaneously Key in 100 Press the START button Notes If the equipment does not work properly after the operation 8 follow the procedure below and then perform the Clearing the ima...

Page 608: ...ld Service Manager Operator s Manual for the details about installation method and functions of FSMS Fig 6 54 Important Updating through USB is not feasible for Windows NT4 0 since this operating system does not support USB When updating through USB using FSMS a printer driver needs to be installed in the PC in advance Refer to the Printing Guide about the installation method of the printer driver...

Page 609: ... name Master data Hard disk uidata2 tz uidata3 tz uidata4 tz uidata5 tz uidata6 tz uidata7 tz webdata1 tz webdata2 tz webdata3 tz webdata4 tz webdata5 tz webdata6 tz all tz System ROM System control PC board SYS board sysfirm tz uidataF tz uidata0 tz uidata1 tz Engine ROM Logic PC board LGC board mfirm tz Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board SLG board scnfirm tz NIC ROM NIC board nicfirm ...

Page 610: ...mat of each firmware is recommended to save at the local drive in the PC C drive etc where FSMS program is installed 1 Connect the equipment and PC with the cable Fig 6 55 USB connection Connect the PC end of the cable to the USB port on the PC 2 Turn ON the power of the equipment Remark When updating with FSMS updating can be performed in any of the normal mode Adjustment Mode 05 and Setting Mode...

Page 611: ...A TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 57 6 6 Click the F W Download button Fig 6 57 7 Select the model name of the equipment to be updated from the drop down menu and click the OK button Fig 6 58 ...

Page 612: ...PC and the equipment to be connected is displayed Select the equipment to be updated and click the Activate FSMS but ton Fig 6 60 Remark The content of Status display can be renewed to the latest status by clicking the Refresh but ton When the status is displayed as Disconnected because the start up of the equipment is delayed the status can be renewed to Connected by clicking this ...

Page 613: ...eck is as follows in the table below Item Firmware Data file name to update Program System ROM sysfirm tz UI Data uidataF tz Common UI Data uidata0 tz 1st Language UI Data uidata1 tz MROM Engine ROM mfirm tz Scan ROM Scanner ROM scnfirm tz NIC ROM NIC ROM nicfirm tz Generic Master data uidata2 tz uidata3 tz uidata4 tz uidata5 tz uidata6 tz uidata7 tz webdata1 tz webdata2 tz webdata3 tz webdata4 tz...

Page 614: ...older where the files are saved and selecting each data file individually Selecting the multiple data files in a batch Select Download File Folder Click the Browse button and select the folder where the files are saved Fig 6 62 Selecting each data file individually Select File Name Conversion Click the Browse button of each data and select the file When Generic Driver is used check the checkbox of...

Page 615: ... files except the displayed file starts Fig 6 64 12 The selected data is transmitted to the equipment The data file name being transmitted and transmission condition are displayed at the bottom Fig 6 65 Remark During transmission the message WAIT or NOW SERVICING is displayed on the LCD screen of the equipment In this case all the button operations are locked 13 When the data transmission is compl...

Page 616: ...O200L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 6 62 14 The equipment restarts automatically and the items to be updated and processing status are dis played on the LCD screen Fig 6 67 04 09 ...

Page 617: ...d is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com pleted properly Turn OFF the power and then check the following items After confirming and clearing the problems restart updating from the beginning Are the equipment and PC properly connected Is the selected data file proper Do the cable equipment and PC operate properly Are FSMS and printer driver properly installed Fig ...

Page 618: ...tes HDD may be destroyed NIC Error Message Error Contents Prescription NIC UPDATE FAILED 1 NIC initialization time out The IP address may not be assigned cor rectly Is the IP address assigned correctly Does the IP address conflict with the other system If the error still occurs replace the NIC board because it may be destroyed NIC UPDATE FAILED 2 ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may b...

Page 619: ...data language 4 in HDD 08 928 Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08 929 Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08 931 Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08 933 HDD data unit version 08 934 Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08 935 Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08 936 Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08 937 Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08 938 Version of Web UI...

Page 620: ...dividually or to update all firmware in a batch The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below Also the data file of each firmware can be used commonly in the updating methods with USB storage device and Download jig Firmware Stored Data file name Master data Hard disk 1 2 3 n The file name should be consecutive num bers from 1 to n without file extens...

Page 621: ...e confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in this equipment when pur chasing the device The USB storage device complied with USB1 1 and USB2 0 can be used for updating How ever the update is performed in the speed of USB1 1 when the device complied with USB2 0 is used Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory such as a USB connection type memory card read...

Page 622: ...orage devices together The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors host In case the printer kit GM 1020 or 1030 printer scanner kit GM 2020 or 2030 and scanner upgrade kit GM 3020 or 3030 are used the update must be performed after all the don gles are disconnected from the USB connector host and only the USB storage device is connected USB storage device USB connector ho...

Page 623: ...orage device Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage device in the following conditions If the USB storage device is not recognized properly the following message is displayed In this case turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly Then repeat the procedure from 4 Fig 6 73 Item Condition 0 OS Update ROM bin is written 1 HDD Update All ...

Page 624: ... in a batch Select items as follows to update individually Updating OS data Select 0 OS Update only Updating Master data Select 1 HDD Update only Updating System ROM Select 2 UI Data Update and 3 System Firmware Update Updating Engine ROM Select 6 Machine Firmware Update only Updating Scanner ROM Select 5 Scanner Firmware Update only Updating NIC ROM Select 4 NIC Firmware Update only Example Updat...

Page 625: ...the START button Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen When the multiple items are selected updating starts in order of item number Fig 6 75 7 Update Completed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com pleted properly Fig 6 76 ...

Page 626: ...o be updated is displayed Continue the updating from procedure 5 However the items already updated are not displayed on the screen Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com pleted properly Turn OFF the power and then check the following items After confirming and clearing the problems restart updating from the beginning Does the USB storage device meet...

Page 627: ... HDD may be destroyed NIC Error Message Error Contents Prescription NIC UPDATE FAILED 1 NIC initialization time out The IP address may not be assigned cor rectly Is the IP address assigned correctly Does the IP address conflict with the other system If the error still occurs replace the NIC board because it may be destroyed NIC UPDATE FAILED 2 ATA driver initialization error The HDD cable may be d...

Page 628: ...n of UI data language 4 in HDD 08 928 Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08 929 Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08 931 Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08 933 HDD unit data version 08 934 Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08 935 Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08 936 Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08 937 Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08 938 Version o...

Page 629: ...status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update As an example the display for updating the system ROM is explained below When the device is recognized properly after 3 minutes the screen for selecting items is dis played Press the START button after selecting the item to be updated The device check starts ...

Page 630: ...4 TOSHIBA TEC 6 76 When the device check completes copying the data to the HDD starts When all files have been copied the backup of RIP font starts When the backup of RIP font is completed the following screen is displayed Updating the mas ter data is completed ...

Page 631: ...FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 77 6 Updating the system ROM starts subsequently The device check starts When the device check completes copying the data to the ROM of the equipment starts When copying the data completes copying the other data are implemented repeatedly ...

Page 632: ...WARE UPDATING June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 6 78 When copying all the data complete the update completes with the following screen If the USB storage device is not recognized properly the following message is displayed and the update is interrupted ...

Page 633: ...June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 79 6 If an error occurs the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted ...

Page 634: ...lows to update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below Firmware Stored Model specific folder name Data file name Master data Hard disk 202_282 1 2 3 n The file name should be consecutive numbers from 1 to n without file extension The capacity of each file is approx 8 M...

Page 635: ...d since the most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment Windows or Macintosh Therefore confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equip ment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the ...

Page 636: ...ta P 6 80 6 5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device e STUDIO202L 232 282 The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format Windows 95 and NT do not support USB Be careful since the data can not be written on the devices in the PCs with these operating systems 2 Shut down the equipment 3 Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector host on the SYS board Fig 6 79 Not...

Page 637: ...Note The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB storage device Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage device in the following conditions Item Condition 0 OS Update firmImage0 bin is written 1 HDD Update All master data files 1 2 3 n are written 2 UI Data Update firmImage0 bin is written 3 System Firmware Updat...

Page 638: ...d connect it again within 3 minutes or turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly Then repeat the procedure from 4 If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored the following mes sage is displayed In this case turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file stored in the USB storage device is correct Then repeat the proc...

Page 639: ...mware of the equipment in a batch Select items as follows to update individually Updating OS data Select 0 OS Update only Updating Master data Select 1 HDD Update only Updating System ROM Select 2 UI Data Update and 3 System Firmware Update Updating Engine ROM Select 4 Machine Firmware Update only Updating Scanner ROM Select 5 Scanner Firmware Update only Example Updating the master data and syste...

Page 640: ... bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com pleted properly Status display during update Status display when update is completed OS Update OS Update Completed HD Data Update HD Data Update Completed UI Data Update UI Data Update Completed SysFirm Update SysFirm Update Completed Engine MAIN Update Flash Update Engine MAIN Update Completed Scanner Firm Update Flash Update Scanner Firm Update...

Page 641: ...s the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating P 6 80 6 5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device e STUDIO202L 232 282 Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device Is the USB storage device installed properly Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly 8 Turn OFF the power remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate 9 Perform the in...

Page 642: ...D 08 929 Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08 931 Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08 933 HDD unit data version 08 934 Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08 935 Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08 936 Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08 937 Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08 938 Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD 08 939 Version of Web UI data language 6 ...

Page 643: ...e update Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below Item Selection Screen for Update Update Completed System ROM Engine ROM scanner ROM 4 Engine Firmware Update Master data 5 Scanner Firmware Update 0 OS Update 1 HDD Update 2 UI Data Update 3 System Firmware Update 05 11 ...

Page 644: ...ormed in the process The initial screen is displayed and the recogni tion of the USB storage device connected to the equipment is started When the device is recognized properly the screen for selecting update items is displayed Select items to be updated and press the START button to start updating the System ROM Master Data Engine ROM and Scanner ROM in parallel Turn ON the power while 4 button a...

Page 645: ...ATING 6 91 6 When the System ROM OS Update has been updated OS Update Completed is displayed and the UI Update update will start When the System ROM UI Update has been updated UI Data Update Completed is dis played and the System Firmware Update update will start 05 11 ...

Page 646: ... updated Engine MAIN Update Flash Update is changed to Engine MAIN Update Com pleted When the System ROM System Firmware Update has been updated SysFirm Update Completed is displayed When the Master Data has been updated HD Data Update Completed is displayed File name of master data Total files Copies 05 11 ...

Page 647: ...00L 202L 230 232 280 282 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 93 6 When the Scanner ROM has been updated Scanner Firm Update Flash Update is changed to Scanner Firm Update Com pleted When all data has been updated Update Completed is displayed 05 11 ...

Page 648: ...e device is not recognized properly the following message is displayed and the update is interrupted Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display Error message Failed items 05 11 ...

Page 649: ...ccurs on the UI data etc which are stored in the HDD the partition with the stored UI data etc is formatted with this function Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary 3 HDD partition creation All Partition delete and create UID rom PRF PR2 SMS Partition When the HDD is replaced or UI data etc are downloaded using the FSMS or USB storage it is necessary to format a partition in ...

Page 650: ...urs on the UI data etc which are stored in the HDD the partition with the stored UI data etc is formatted with this function Do not use this function since it is not nor mally necessary 3 HDD partition creation All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition When the HDD is replaced or UI data etc are downloaded using the USB storage it is neces sary to format a partition in the HDD before downlo...

Page 651: ...tput to the SYS board 5 1VB CN705 Pin 25 Output to the SYS board 5 1VB CN706 Pin 26 Output to the FUS board 5 1VB CN706 Pins 27 and 28 Output to the LGC board PFP LCF via LGC board Bridge unit Job separator Offset tray via LGC board 5 1VB CN707 Pin 4 Output to the finisher 5 1VB CN708 Pins 3 and 4 Output to the SLG board 5 1VB CN708 Pins 5 and 6 Output to the RADF 3 12V 12VA CN705 Pin 7 Output to ...

Page 652: ...utput to the RADF 24VD4 CN708 Pins 19 and 20 Output to the SLG board 24VD5 CN707 Pin 8 Output to the finisher Output connector Not linked with the door switch Linked with the door switch Connector Destination Voltage CN705 For the SYS board 3 3VA 3 3VB 5 1VA 5 1VB 12VA 12VB 12VA 12VB CN706 For the LGC board FUS board PFP LCF via LGC board Bridge unit Job separator Offset tray via LGC board 3 3VB 5...

Page 653: ...rnal cooling fan 2 Auto toner sensor Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch Registration roller clutch Upper transport clutch Middle transport clutch Lower transport clutch Discharge LED Main switch PFP LCF 24VD2 LGC Exit motor F5 5A Semi time lag ADU motor Exhaust fan Bypass feed clutch ADU clutch Bypass pickup solenoid High voltage transformer Key copy counter Copy key card Bridge uni...

Page 654: ...via LGC board Bridge unit Job separator Offset tray via LGC board 5 1VD CN706 LGC board PFP LCF via LGC board 24VD1 24VD2 CN706 CN706 Main motor 24VD1 CN707 24VD2 CN707 SYS board FUS board PFP LCF via LGC board Bridge unit Job separator Offset tray via LGC board CN705 CN705 CN706 Regulator Regulator F4 RADF 24VD3 CN708 F6 SLG board 24VD4 CN708 F7 F2 F1 Finisher 24VD5 CN707 HTR1ON CN706 HTR2ON CN70...

Page 655: ...ner 1 Placing an Order There are two ways to place an order FAX Installation of the FAX board is required If the FAX board has not been installed it is regarded as OFF setting E mail E mail body TIFF image 2 Order Intervals When the toner empty occurs the number of occurrences is counted And when it reaches the spec ified number for CONDITION the order is placed automatically 3 If Order Failure Oc...

Page 656: ...ls are available Confirm the details to the administrator 1 Self diagnosis 08 Setting As the default setting the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel To display it switching the Valid Invalid setting 08 765 is required 0 Valid FAX Internet FAX 1 Valid FAX Internet FAX HTTP 2 Invalid Default When changing the setting value from 2 default to 0 the Auto Supply Order se...

Page 657: ...ICE SUPPLY ORDER SETUP ORDER INFORMATION 1 HTTP has not been supported yet 2 Even when FAX is selected the order is not placed without entering the FAX number 3 Even when MAIL is selected the order is not placed without entering the E mail address AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by FAX MAIL HTTP 1 FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier 2 E MAIL E mail address of supplier 3 CUSTOMER Customer information NAME ...

Page 658: ...nding an E mail validity of the address is checked If the address is invalid it is not sent 3 Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the setting list USER FUNCTIONS USER LISTS 3 8 START TONER ORDER Order information TONER PART NUMBER Part number to be ordered CONDITION The number of conditions 1 QUANTITY The quantity to be ordered AUTO ORDER...

Page 659: ...ress the USER FUNCTIONS button to enter the user function screen 4 Press the ADMIN button When the Administrator Password has been set ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is displayed Fig 8 1 5 Press the PASSWORD button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then key in the Administrator Password and press the ENTER button Confirm the password to the administrator Fig 8 2 6 Press the SERVICE butt...

Page 660: ... 280 282 REMOTE SERVICE June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 8 6 7 The SERVICE screen is displayed Fig 8 3 8 Press the SUPPLY ORDER SETUP button Fig 8 4 9 Press the ORDER INFORMATION button 10 The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed Fig 8 5 ...

Page 661: ... by E mail the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the address 12 Press the NEXT button Press the ENTER button to register and then the screen returns to the 7 SERVICE screen Press the CANCEL button to cancel this register and then the screen returns to the 7 SER VICE screen 13 The CUSTOMER SUPPLIER screen is displayed Fig 8 6 14 Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER SUP...

Page 662: ...BER Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL Input the E mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN DESCRIPTION Input the remarks if you want to register RESULT PRINTING OFF ALWAYS ON ERROR Whichever you press the result list is printed 18 Press the ENTER button to register and complete the order inf...

Page 663: ... 2004 TOSHIBA TEC e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 REMOTE SERVICE 8 9 8 20 Press the SUPPLY ORDER SETUP button Fig 8 9 21 Press the TONER ORDERING button 22 The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed Fig 8 10 ...

Page 664: ...reaches the number specified for the CON DITION QUANTITY Quantity to be ordered AUTO ORDER ON OFF Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not 25 Press the ENTER button to register the setting of toner order 26 The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING 27 Press the USER FUNCTION button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and returned to the BAS...

Page 665: ...50 letters CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 739 Maximum 32 letters CUSTOMER E MAIL 740 Maximum 192 letters CUSTOMER ADDRESS 741 Maximum 100 letters SUPPLIER NAME 746 Maximum 50 letters SUPPLIER ADDRESS 747 Maximum 100 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER 742 Maximum 5 digits SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME 743 Maximum 50 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER 744 Maximum 32 digits SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL 745 Maximum 192...

Page 666: ...XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER QUANTITY TONER CARTRIDGE BLACK XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 DESCRIPTION AREA DEVICE DESCRIPTION XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERIAL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX DEVICE FAX NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX DEVICE E M...

Page 667: ...XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER QUANTITY TONER CARTRIDGE BLACK XXXXXXXXXXXX 99 DESCRIPTION AREA DEVICE DESCRIPTION XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERIAL NUMBER XXXXXXXXX...

Page 668: ...ctive it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call error PM Counter Transmit When this function is effective it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count has reached to its setting value or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value 8 2 2 Setting Note Note When using this function it is required that sending and receiving E mails or FA...

Page 669: ... 282 REMOTE SERVICE 8 15 8 2 Setting procedure 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button and select the ADMIN button Then enter the password and press the ENTER button Confirm the password to the administrator Fig 8 15 2 Press the SERVICE button Fig 8 16 05 05 ...

Page 670: ...VICE June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 8 16 3 Press the SERVICE NOTIFICATION button Fig 8 17 4 Press the E MAIL or FAX button in SERVICE NOTIFICATION When the OFF button is pressed all functions related Service Notification become ineffec tive Fig 8 18 05 05 ...

Page 671: ...s or FAX number of the destination When pressing the E MAIL button the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then enter the E mail addresses and press the ENTER button Maximum 3 addresses can be set Fig 8 19 Press the FAX NUMBER button key in the FAX number and then press the ENTER button Fig 8 20 05 05 ...

Page 672: ...lumn of Time and press the SET button Correct the value by pressing the CLEAR button if the SET button is not yet pressed Correct the value by pressing the RESET button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the SET button is already pressed Press the ENTER button to set all The display returns to the screen at procedure 5 7 Press the ENTER button The setting completes Note Note S...

Page 673: ...nt 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount 1 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 1 Charge Counter Large Small Print Counter Copy 00000000 00000000 Print 00000000 00000000 List 00000000 00000000 FAX 00000000 00000000 Scan Counter Copy Scan 00000000 00000000 FAX Scan 00000000 00000000 Net Scan 00000000 00000000 FAX Counter Transmit 00000000 00000000 Receive 00000000 00000000 Perio...

Page 674: ...mber of output pages in the Printer Function Number of output pages at the List Print Mode Number of output pages in the FAX Function Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function Number of received pages in the FAX Function PM count setting value...

Page 675: ...ARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION 1 CHARGE COUNTER PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER LARGE SMALL LARGE SMALL COPY 00000000 00000000 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000 PRINT 00000000 00000000 FAX SCAN 00000000 00000000 LIST 00000000 00000000 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000 FAX 00000000 00000000 FAX COUNTER PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER LARGE SMALL TRANSMIT 00000000 00000000 SET PM 00000000 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000 CURR...

Page 676: ...r of output pages in the Printer Function Number of output pages at the List Print Mode Number of output pages in the FAX Function Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function Number of received pages in the FAX Function PM count setting value PM...

Page 677: ...e Error message The content of error is displayed History of error 1 The latest 20 errors are displayed Date 07 11 2004 13 47 Machine Name e STUDIO280 SerialNumber 1234567890 Function Print Severity Error ErrorCode XXXX Message XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Printer Error History Date Time ErrorCode 05 18 2004 16 44 F110 05 15 2004 22 28 F110 05 15 2004 22 23 F110 04 15 2004 ...

Page 678: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 REMOTE SERVICE June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 8 24 ...

Page 679: ...0h Bulk only Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore applicable to this data cloning However most of these devices were origi nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs e g Windows or Macintosh and thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed Therefore the user must thoroughly check in advance ...

Page 680: ...file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format Windows95 and NT do not support USB The data cannot be written into the device with the PC in which these OS are installed 2 Write the program file Write the data cloning program into the root directory 3 Shut down the equipment 4 Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector host on the SYS board Fig 9 1 Notes Do not connect...

Page 681: ... keys In case of backup select one of the following items Backing up User data Select 1 User Data Back Up Backing up Setting item Select 3 Setting Back Up Backing up SRAM data Select 5 SRAM Data Back Up Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a long time 7 Press the 1 button The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed In this scr...

Page 682: ...Selecting 4 performs 1 2 and 3 together To back up the data individually select the following items Backing up Address book Select 1 Address Book only Backing up Mail box Select 2 Mail Box only Backing up Template Select 3 Template only Backing up 1 Address Book 2 Mail Box and 3 Template in a batch Select 4 Combined only Backing up Department management Select 5 Department Code only Backing up Use...

Page 683: ...creens are given as an example of when all items are backed up 9 Press the Start button The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen Fig 9 5 10 Back Up Completed is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com pleted Fig 9 6 11 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device 05 11 ...

Page 684: ...ON while pressing the 5 and 9 button simultaneously The screen to select the backup restore items is displayed Fig 9 7 Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a long time 14 Press the 3 button The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed In this screen the items to be backed up are shown after the mark No items are selected in the s...

Page 685: ... Select 1 Network Print Service only Backing up TopAccess SaveAsFile Email InternetFAX Select 2 SaveAsFile Email InternetFAX only Backing up TopAccess Notification Select 3 Notification only Backing up TopAccess Directory Service Select 4 Directory Service only Backing up Option Fax setting Select 5 FAX Kit only Backing up Option WirelessLAN Bluetooth setting Select 6 WirelessLAN Bluetooth Kit onl...

Page 686: ...eted Fig 9 10 18 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device SRAM Data Backup 19 Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector host on the SYS board 20 Turn the power ON while pressing the 5 and 9 button simultaneously The screen to select the backup restore items is displayed Fig 9 11 Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a lon...

Page 687: ... keys The mark is shown on the selected item The mark can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed To back up the data individually select the following item Backing up SRAM Data Select 1 SRAM Note Note The backup restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored The following sc...

Page 688: ...NING with USB STORAGE DEVICE e STUDIO202L 232 282 June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 9 10 24 Back Up Completed is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com pleted Fig 9 14 25 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device 05 11 ...

Page 689: ...ing data cloning or the data could be dam aged and the operation not carried out properly 1 Shut down the equipment 2 Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector host on the SYS board Fig 9 15 Notes Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors host In case the printer kit GM 1070 or GM 1080U printer scanner kit G...

Page 690: ...ital keys In case of restore select the following items Restoring User data Select 2 User Data Restore Restoring Setting item Select 4 Setting Restore Restoring SRAM data Select 6 SRAM Data Restore Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a long time 5 Press the 2 button The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed In this screen ...

Page 691: ...3 together To restore the data individually select the following items Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually Restoring Address book Select 1 Address Book only Restoring Mail box Select 2 Mail Box only Restoring Template Select 3 Template only Restoring 1 Address Book 2 Mail Box and 3 Template in a batch Select 4 Combined only Restoring Department management Select 5 Dep...

Page 692: ... on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com pleted Fig 9 20 9 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device 10 Clear the counter in case of restoring Department Code and User Info Since the counter values are also copied clear all of them However the total counter is not cop ied Procedure Press the buttons as follows USER FUNCTION ADMIN Enter the password COUNTER DEPARTMENT SE...

Page 693: ... ON while pressing the 5 and 9 button simultaneously The screen to select the backup restore items is displayed Fig 9 21 Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a long time 13 Press the 4 button The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed In this screen the items to be restored are shown after the mark No items are selected in the...

Page 694: ...s SaveAsFile Email InternetFAX Select 2 SaveAsFile Email InternetFAX only Restoring TopAccess Notification Select 3 Notification only Restoring TopAccess Directory Service Select 4 Directory Service only Restoring Option Fax setting Select 5 FAX Kit only Restoring Option WirelessLAN Bluetooth setting Select 6 WirelessLAN Bluetooth Kit only Note Note Be sure to restore the same option items in the ...

Page 695: ...leted Fig 9 24 17 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device SRAM Data Restore 18 Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector host on the SYS board 19 Turn the power ON while pressing the 5 and 9 button simultaneously The screen to select the backup restore items is displayed Fig 9 25 Note Note After the item is selected with the digital keys displaying the next menu may take a l...

Page 696: ... keys The mark is shown on the selected item The mark can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed To restore the data individually select the following item Restoring SRAM Data Select 1 SRAM Note Note The backup restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored The following scr...

Page 697: ...232 280 282 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE e STUDIO202L 232 282 9 19 9 23 Restore Completed is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com pleted Fig 9 28 24 Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device 05 11 ...

Page 698: ...ata again from the beginning Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly Is the USB storage device installed properly Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged Fig 9 29 Error number Error content ERROR 1 Copy error ERROR 2 I F error ERROR 3 USB memory full error ERROR 4 Working folder er...

Page 699: ...r_data txt setting_data txt sram_data txt all in common Line 1 Version Line 2 Serial number Line 3 Date Data item File name Address book BACKUP_ADDR sct Mailbox BACKUP_MBOX sct Template BACKUP_TEMP sct Back up the Address book Mailbox and Template in a batch BACKUP_ALL sct Department management information BACKUP_Department sct User management information BACKUP_User sct Data item File name Networ...

Page 700: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE e STUDIO202L 232 282 June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 9 22 ...

Page 701: ...P2 IN N AC L DRM DH THERMO DRM DH THERMO FSR F THERMO FSR C FUSER PS ACC MAIN SW MAIN SWITCH INLET AC IN MAIN GND FG COV INTLCK SW OTHER MODELS STANDARD NAD MJD MODELS OPTION 2 1 1 2 AC SW OUT N GND AC SW OUT L AC DOOR N AC DOOR L AC SW OUT L AC SW OUT N AC MAIN N AC MAIN L 5V DC DC AC ADAPTER DRM DH TRC1 TRC2 AC DC AC DC B A C D 26 25 4 1 1 3 4 6 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 C A B AC SW IN L AC SW IN N 2 ...

Page 702: ...e STUDIO200L 202L 230 232 280 282 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS June 2004 TOSHIBA TEC 10 2 ...

Page 703: ...RS SG SG 5 1VB 5 1VB 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 25 24 23 22 21 20 26 27 28 50 49 45 44 43 42 41 46 47 48 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 70 69 65 64 63 62 61 66 67 68 80 79 75 74 73 72 71 76 77 78 1 2 3 3 2 1 19 15 14 13 12 11 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 25 24 23 22 21 20 26 27 28 50 49 45 44 43 42 41 46 47 48 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 70 69 65 64 6...

Page 704: ...ry data bus 47 105 NC Not connected 106 NC Not connected 107 SG Signal ground 108 NC Not connected 109 NC Not connected 110 3 3VA 3 3 V 111 CAS Column address strobe signal 112 DQMB4 Output disable write mask 4 113 DQMB5 Output disable write mask 5 114 CS1 Chip select signal 1 115 RAS Row address strobe signal 116 SG Signal ground 117 A1 Memory address bus 1 118 A3 Memory address bus 3 119 A5 Memo...

Page 705: ...A 6 A 8 A 10 A 12 A 14 A 16 A 18 SG SG D 1 D 3 D 5 D 7 CS2 0 A 1 A 3 A 5 A 7 A 9 A 11 A 13 A 15 A 17 ROMDT 0 5 1VB LED 0A MAD 17 LED 5 1VB ROMDT MAD 15 MAD 13 MAD 11 MAD 9 MAD 7 MAD 5 PNLDT3 PNLDT1 PNLDT2 PNLDT0 PNLCS MDT 7 MDT 5 MDT 3 MDT 1 SG SG MAD 18 MAD 16 MAD 14 MAD 12 MAD 10 MAD 8 MAD 6 MAD 4 MRD MDT 6 MDT 4 MDT 2 MDT 0 PWA F CCD 2 3 1 HOME SNR 2 3 1 PLTN SNR 2 3 1 APS1 A4 series only INV E...

Page 706: ...ry data bus 30 132 SG Signal ground 133 DQ31 Memory data bus 31 134 CB4 Not used 135 CB5 Not used 136 VDD 2 5 V 137 CK0 Clock 0 input 138 CK0 Differential clock 0 input 139 SG Signal ground 140 DM8 Data write mask signal 8 141 A10 Memory address bus 10 142 CB6 Not used 143 VDD 2 5 V 144 CB7 Not used 145 SG Signal ground 146 DQ36 Memory data bus 36 147 DQ37 Memory data bus 37 148 VDD 2 5 V 149 DM4 ...

Page 707: ......

Page 708: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for e-STUDIO200L

IBM 3130 Planning Manual preview
3130
Brand: IBM Pages: 112
Xerox All in One Printer Product Safety Data Sheet preview
All in One Printer
Brand: Xerox Pages: 3
Canon iP2600 - PIXMA Color Inkjet Printer Setup Instructions preview
iP2600 - PIXMA Color Inkjet Printer
Brand: Canon Pages: 2
Canon FAXPHONE L80 Setup Instructions preview
FAXPHONE L80
Brand: Canon Pages: 8
Canon ImageCLASS 2300 Network Manual preview
ImageCLASS 2300
Brand: Canon Pages: 102
Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8300S Basic Manual preview
imagePROGRAF iPF8300S
Brand: Canon Pages: 52
Canon i250 Series Specification preview
i250 Series
Brand: Canon Pages: 2
Xerox 4050 Product Reference preview
4050
Brand: Xerox Pages: 68
Xerox 460 Installation And Troubleshooting Manual preview
460
Brand: Xerox Pages: 210
Xerox WORKCENTRE 5735 Information Manual preview
WORKCENTRE 5735
Brand: Xerox Pages: 50
Xerox DocuPrint C3055 DX Settings Manual preview
DocuPrint C3055 DX
Brand: Xerox Pages: 20
Canon imageRUNNER 2545i Addendum Manual preview
imageRUNNER 2545i
Brand: Canon Pages: 37
Ricoh MP 2554SP Series Configuration Manual preview
MP 2554SP Series
Brand: Ricoh Pages: 1
Evolis Zenius User Manual preview
Zenius
Brand: Evolis Pages: 63
Lexmark XS790 Series Brochure & Specs preview
XS790 Series
Brand: Lexmark Pages: 8
Oki MPS730b Manual De L'Utilisateur preview
MPS730b
Brand: Oki Pages: 143
Oce im3530 Operator'S Manual preview
im3530
Brand: Oce Pages: 186
Kyocera ECOSYS P5021cdw Frequently Asked Questions Manual preview
ECOSYS P5021cdw
Brand: Kyocera Pages: 31

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands